Revit MEP 2010

Imperial Tutorial

March 2009

©

2009 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Except as otherwise permitted by Autodesk, Inc., this publication, or parts thereof, may not be reproduced in any form, by any method, for any purpose. Certain materials included in this publication are reprinted with the permission of the copyright holder. Disclaimer THIS PUBLICATION AND THE INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IS MADE AVAILABLE BY AUTODESK, INC. "AS IS." AUTODESK, INC. DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE REGARDING THESE MATERIALS. Trademarks The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., in the USA and other countries: 3DEC (design/logo), 3December, 3December.com, 3ds Max, ADI, Alias, Alias (swirl design/logo), AliasStudio, Alias|Wavefront (design/logo), ATC, AUGI, AutoCAD, AutoCAD Learning Assistance, AutoCAD LT, AutoCAD Simulator, AutoCAD SQL Extension, AutoCAD SQL Interface, Autodesk, Autodesk Envision, Autodesk Insight, Autodesk Intent, Autodesk Inventor, Autodesk Map, Autodesk MapGuide, Autodesk Streamline, AutoLISP, AutoSnap, AutoSketch, AutoTrack, Backdraft, Built with ObjectARX (logo), Burn, Buzzsaw, CAiCE, Can You Imagine, Character Studio, Cinestream, Civil 3D, Cleaner, Cleaner Central, ClearScale, Colour Warper, Combustion, Communication Specification, Constructware, Content Explorer, Create>what's>Next> (design/logo), Dancing Baby (image), DesignCenter, Design Doctor, Designer's Toolkit, DesignKids, DesignProf, DesignServer, DesignStudio, Design|Studio (design/logo), Design Web Format, Discreet, DWF, DWG, DWG (logo), DWG Extreme, DWG TrueConvert, DWG TrueView, DXF, Ecotect, Exposure, Extending the Design Team, Face Robot, FBX, Filmbox, Fire, Flame, Flint, FMDesktop, Freewheel, Frost, GDX Driver, Gmax, Green Building Studio, Heads-up Design, Heidi, HumanIK, IDEA Server, i-drop, ImageModeler, iMOUT, Incinerator, Inferno, Inventor, Inventor LT, Kaydara, Kaydara (design/logo), Kynapse, Kynogon, LandXplorer, LocationLogic, Lustre, Matchmover, Maya, Mechanical Desktop, Moonbox, MotionBuilder, Movimento, Mudbox, NavisWorks, ObjectARX, ObjectDBX, Open Reality, Opticore, Opticore Opus, PolarSnap, PortfolioWall, Powered with Autodesk Technology, Productstream, ProjectPoint, ProMaterials, RasterDWG, Reactor, RealDWG, Real-time Roto, REALVIZ, Recognize, Render Queue, Retimer,Reveal, Revit, Showcase, ShowMotion, SketchBook, Smoke, Softimage, Softimage|XSI (design/logo), SteeringWheels, Stitcher, Stone, StudioTools, Topobase, Toxik, TrustedDWG, ViewCube, Visual, Visual Construction, Visual Drainage, Visual Landscape, Visual Survey, Visual Toolbox, Visual LISP, Voice Reality, Volo, Vtour, Wire, Wiretap, WiretapCentral, XSI, and XSI (design/logo). The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk Canada Co. in the USA and/or Canada and other countries: Backburner,Multi-Master Editing, River, and Sparks. The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of MoldflowCorp. in the USA and/or other countries: Moldflow, MPA, MPA (design/logo),Moldflow Plastics Advisers, MPI, MPI (design/logo), Moldflow Plastics Insight,MPX, MPX (design/logo), Moldflow Plastics Xpert. Third Party Software Program Credits ACIS Copyright© 1989-2001 Spatial Corp. Portions Copyright© 2002 Autodesk, Inc. Flash ® is a registered trademark of Macromedia, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. International CorrectSpell™ Spelling Correction System© 1995 by Lernout & Hauspie Speech Products, N.V. All rights reserved. InstallShield™ 3.0. Copyright© 1997 InstallShield Software Corporation. All rights reserved. PANTONE® Colors displayed in the software application or in the user documentation may not match PANTONE-identified standards. Consult current PANTONE Color Publications for accurate color. PANTONE Color Data and/or Software shall not be copied onto another disk or into memory unless as part of the execution of this Autodesk software product. Portions Copyright© 1991-1996 Arthur D. Applegate. All rights reserved. Portions of this software are based on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. RAL DESIGN© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 RAL CLASSIC© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 Representation of the RAL Colors is done with the approval of RAL Deutsches Institut für Gütesicherung und Kennzeichnung e.V. (RAL German Institute for Quality Assurance and Certification, re. Assoc.), D-53757 Sankt Augustin. Typefaces from the Bitstream® typeface library copyright 1992. Typefaces from Payne Loving Trust© 1996. All rights reserved. Printed manual and help produced with Idiom WorldServer™. WindowBlinds: DirectSkin™ OCX © Stardock® AnswerWorks 4.0 ©; 1997-2003 WexTech Systems, Inc. Portions of this software © Vantage-Knexys. All rights reserved. The Director General of the Geographic Survey Institute has issued the approval for the coordinates exchange numbered TKY2JGD for Japan Geodetic Datum 2000, also known as technical information No H1-N0.2 of the Geographic Survey Institute, to be installed and used within this software product (Approval No.: 646 issued by GSI, April 8, 2002). Portions of this computer program are copyright © 1995-1999 LizardTech, Inc. All rights reserved. MrSID is protected by U.S. Patent No. 5,710,835. Foreign Patents Pending. Portions of this computer program are Copyright ©; 2000 Earth Resource Mapping, Inc. OSTN97 © Crown Copyright 1997. All rights reserved. OSTN02 © Crown copyright 2002. All rights reserved. OSGM02 © Crown copyright 2002, © Ordnance Survey Ireland, 2002. FME Objects Engine © 2005 SAFE Software. All rights reserved. ETABS is a registered trademark of Computers and Structures, Inc. ETABS © copyright 1984-2005 Computers and Structures, Inc. All rights reserved. RISA is a trademark of RISA Technologies. RISA-3D copyright © 1993-2005 RISA Technologies. All rights reserved.

Portions relating to JPEG © Copyright 1991-1998 Thomas G. Lane. All rights reserved. This software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. Portions relating to TIFF © Copyright 1997-1998 Sam Leffler. © Copyright 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. All rights reserved. The Tiff portions of this software are provided by the copyright holders and contributors “as is” and any express or implied warranties, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties or merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose are disclaimed. In no event shall the copyright owner or contributors of the TIFF portions be liable for any direct, indirect, incidental, special, exemplary, or consequential damages (including, but not limited to, procurement of substitute goods or services; loss of use, data, or profits; or business interruption) however caused and on any theory of liability, whether in contract, strict liability, or tort (including negligence or otherwise) arising in any way out of the use of the TIFF portions of this software, even if advised of the possibility of such damage. Portions of Libtiff 3.5.7 Copyright © 1988-1997 Sam Leffler. Copyright © 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted without fee, provided that (i) the above copyright notices and this permission notice appear in all copies of the software and related documentation, and (ii) the names of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics may not be used in any advertising or publicity relating to the software without the specific, prior written permission of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics. Portions of Libxml2 2.6.4 Copyright © 1998-2003 Daniel Veillard. All Rights Reserved. Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the “Software”), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: The above copyright notices and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. Government Use Use, duplication, or disclosure by the U.S. Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in FAR 12.212 (Commercial Computer Software-Restricted Rights) and DFAR 227.7202 (Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software), as applicable.

Contents

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Chapter 1 Using the Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
What is in the Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Accessing Training Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

Chapter 2

Understanding the Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Understanding the Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Using the Revit MEP User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Parts of the Revit Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Modifying the View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Performing Common Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Chapter 3

Getting Started with MEP Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Creating an MEP Project . . . . . . . . . . Linking Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Applying a View Template . Modifying System Settings . . . . . . . . . Modifying General System Options . Specifying File Locations . . . . . . Specifying Spelling Options . . . . . Modifying Snap Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 . 30 . 34 . 35 . 35 . 36 . 39 . 40

Creating a Mechanical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Preparing Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Placing Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Placing a Space in an Open Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

v

Placing a Multi-Level Space . . . . . . . Viewing Zones in the System Browser . . Creating Zones on a Single Level . . . . Creating Zones on Multiple Levels . . . Working with the Analytical Model . . . Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads . Creating a Zone Color Scheme . . . . . Creating an Airflow Schedule . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. 56 . 59 . 60 . 62 . 64 . 69 . 72 . 75

Chapter 5

Designing Mechanical Air Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Placing Hosted Air Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems . . . . . . . . . Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems . Manually Creating Ductwork . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 . . 85 . . 92 . . 94 . 102

Chapter 6

Designing a Mechanical Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Adding Mechanical Equipment . . Creating a Piping System . . . . . . Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout . . Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout . Adding Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . Sizing Pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inspecting the System . . . . . . . Checking Piping Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 . 114 . 119 . 128 . 142 . 146 . 149 . 151

Creating an Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Specifying Electrical Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 Defining Required Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 Creating Color Fills and Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163

Chapter 8

Designing an Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills . Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures . . . . . . . . . Placing Switches, Junction Boxes, and Receptacles . . . . . Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Switch System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Power Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Balancing Wire Size and Breaker Service . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Panel Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking Your Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 . 177 . 183 . 193 . 200 . 204 . 207 . 211 . 213 . 214

Creating a Plumbing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 Chapter 9 Planning a Plumbing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Configuring a Plumbing and Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

Chapter 10

Designing a Plumbing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 Creating a Sanitary System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235

vi | Contents

Refining the Sanitary Stack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 Creating the Cold Water System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 Creating the Hot Water System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256

Creating a Fire Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265 Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Specifying Pipe Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 Determining Zone Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270

Chapter 12

Designing a Fire Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Adding Sprinklers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . Completing the Fire Protection Wet System . Adding Vertical Supply Piping . . . . . . . . Modifying Pipe Diameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 . 284 . 289 . 294 . 299

Documenting a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Duplicating Plan Views . . . . . . . . Creating Dependent Views . . . . . . Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser . Creating Callout Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307 . 308 . 311 . 315

Chapter 14

Working with Annotations and Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Creating Annotations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322 Creating Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327 Creating a Legend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329

Chapter 15

Detailing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
Creating a Model-Based Electrical Riser Diagram Detail . Creating Detail Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail . . . . . . . . Drafting Detail Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Importing a CAD Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335 . 338 . 348 . 353 . 364

Contents | vii

viii .

Finally.Introduction In this tutorial. You also learn how to use the Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 user interface to perform common tasks. 1 . you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to access the tutorial training files. you learn how to create and set up an MEP project.

2 .

Germany. such as mechanical equipment. including an overview of the building information model that you design in the tutorials. 3 . The tutorials are also available in PDF format by clicking Help menu ➤ Documents on the Web in Revit MEP. and plumbing engineering workflows.Using the Tutorials 1 This lesson provides information on how to get started with the Revit® MEP 2010 tutorials. What is in the Tutorials In these tutorials. such as duct. you learn how to design a building information model (BIM) in Revit MEP. fixtures. and piping. The Contents tab of the Revit MEP Tutorials window displays the available tutorial titles. The technical training facility you design was a product of a design competition in Munich. Expand a title for a list of lessons in the tutorial. electrical panels. Add more detailed modelling elements. You complete the following phases of design: ■ ■ ■ Import the architectural floor plan in either a 2D (DWG) or a 3D (RVT) format. and where to find the training files required to complete the exercises. NOTE You may find it helpful to print a tutorial to make it easier to reference the instructions as you work in Revit MEP. and plumbing fixtures. electrical. Expand a lesson title for a list of exercises in the lesson. This building is also used as the model in the Revit® Architecture and Revit® Structure 2010 tutorials. How the tutorials are organized The tutorials are designed to follow the typical mechanical. Add basic MEP elements.

You do not design entire systems. is located and accessed in the training files location. IMPORTANT Content used in the tutorials. but only enough of a system to learn how to use the tools and options in the product. it is recommended that you begin each exercise by opening the training provided. Training files are grouped into 2 folders within the Training folder: ■ ■ Imperial: files for users working with imperial units. The tutorial exercises are designed to be basic and brief. you can choose to save your work. Imperial file names have an _i suffix. 4 | Chapter 1 Using the Tutorials . So. Create schedules. however. The tutorials include a Training File section that references the training file to be used with the tutorial. Locate the training files The Tutorials option on the Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 Help menu provides a link to the installation website for the tutorial content and training files. Accessing Training Files Training files are Revit MEP projects. and families that were created specifically for use with the tutorials. For example. the exercises and lessons can be completed in any order. When you install the training files as instructed. Each training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. NOTE Depending on your installation. Metric: files for users working with metric units. you can complete any exercise without first completing the preceding exercises. These elements enhance the exercises you complete. you learn where the training files are located. such as templates and families. When you open a training file. and tags. as well as how to open and save them. your Training folder may be in a different location. the tutorials are grouped and presented in a recommended order for optimal learning. elements such as additional ductwork and equipment are incorporated into subsequent training files. Create detail views. views. Use the training files A training file is a Revit MEP project that defines a building information model and views of the model that are used to complete the steps in a tutorial. In this exercise. you only draw the duct in one wing of the building. After completing each exercise. you may notice that MEP elements are included that were not specifically added in an exercise. templates. Open a training file 1 Click ➤ Open.■ ■ ■ Analyze systems and refine MEP elements. they are copied to the default location C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RME 2010\Training. The training files include a starting point for each tutorial exercise. On the Contents tab. and sheets to document the project. For example. all content used in the tutorials is installed in the training files location to ensure that all audiences access the correct files. annotations. to provide a richer and more finished design. Contact your CAD manager for more information. when you add ductwork. However. Although this content may be installed in other locations on your system. Metric file names have an _m suffix.

8 If you have made changes. Accessing Training Files | 5 . enter the new file name. select the folder in which to save the new file.NOTE If you click the word Open in the menu. and you can open any supported file type. you are prompted to save the changes. You may close the file with or without saving changes. verify that Project Files (*.rvt. if you open settings. and click Save. the Open dialog displays. and click the Training Files icon. NOTE You are not required to save your work in a training file. For example. click ➤ Save As. scroll down. 3 In the right pane. For Files of type. Click a file type to display the Open dialog for the specified file type. A training file is provided as a starting point for each exercise. 6 Complete the information in the Save As dialog: ■ For Save in. You can save the file in the appropriate Training Files folder or in another location. A good practice is to save the training file with a unique name after you have made changes. you should save this file with a new name such as settings_modified.rvt) is selected. and click Open.rvt and make changes. ■ ■ Close a training file 7 Click ➤ Close. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 4 Click the training file name. For File name. Save a training file 5 To save a training file with a new name. double-click Imperial or Metric. depending on the instructions in the tutorial. If you click the arrow to the right of the Open option. a list of file types displays.

6 .

the operation of the software is parametric. 2D and 3D view. the parameter is one of association or connection. This capability delivers the fundamental coordination and productivity benefits of Revit MEP: Change anything at any time anywhere in the project. and how to perform some common tasks in the product. If you move the partition. The Revit MEP parametric change engine automatically coordinates changes made anywhere—in model views. In this case. In mathematics and mechanical CAD. schedules. and phases when you need it. and Revit MEP coordinates that change through the entire project. and plans. These relationships are created either automatically by the software or by you as you work. the hierarchy of elements. the parameter is not a number but a proportional characteristic. ■ ■ 7 . drawing sheets. What is meant by parametric? The term parametric refers to the relationships among all elements of the design that enable the coordination and change management that Revit MEP provides. Understanding the Concepts What is Autodesk Revit MEP 2010? The Revit MEP platform for building information modelling is a design and documentation system that supports the design. If the length of the elevation is changed. you learn what Revit MEP is and how its parametric change engine benefits you and your work. and schedules required for a building project. Building information modelling (BIM) delivers information about project design. hence. You learn the terminology. the relationship of equal spacing is maintained. The following are examples of these element relationships: ■ The outside of a door frame is a fixed dimension on the hinge side from a perpendicular partition. quantities. As you work in drawing and schedule views. Windows or pilasters are spaced equally across a given elevation. the floor or roof remains connected. every drawing sheet. You begin with the fundamental concepts on which Revit MEP is built. Revit MEP collects information about the building project and coordinates this information across all other representations of the project. In the Revit MEP model. The edge of a floor or roof is related to the exterior wall such that when the exterior wall is moved. sections. and schedule is a presentation of information from the same underlying building model database. drawings. the door retains this relationship to the partition.Understanding the Basics 2 In this lesson. the numbers or characteristics that define these kinds of relationships are called parameters. scope. In this case.

For example. and 2D detail components. ducts. filled regions. dimensions. and reference planes are datum elements. You do not have to intervene to update drawings or links. dimensions. tags. and electrical panels. Element behavior in a parametric modeler In projects. ■ ■ There are 2 types of model elements: ■ Hosts (or host elements) are generally built in place at the construction site.How does Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 keep things updated? A fundamental characteristic of a building information modelling application is the ability to coordinate changes and maintain consistency at all times. Model components are all the other types of elements in the building model. sprinklers. and 2D detail components are view-specific elements. For example. View-specific elements display only in the views in which they are placed. The result of these concepts is software that works like you do. Datum elements help to define project context. sinks. They display in relevant views of the design. ducts. and electrical panels. For example. ■ 8 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . ■ There are 2 types of view-specific elements: ■ Annotation elements are 2D components that document the model and maintain scale on paper. Details are 2D items that provide details about the building model in a particular view. and keynotes are annotation elements. sprinklers. grids. They help to describe or document the design. Examples include detail lines. tags. without requiring entry of data that is unimportant to your design. The second is its approach to propagating building changes. sinks. boilers. Revit MEP immediately determines what is affected by the change and reflects that change to any affected elements. Revit MEP uses 2 key concepts that make it especially powerful and easy to use. boilers. When you change something. Revit MEP uses 3 types of elements: ■ Model elements represent the actual 3D geometry of the building. walls and ceilings are hosts. For example. levels. The first is the capturing of relationships while the designer works. For example. For example.

In Revit MEP. and ceilings. If you can draw. floors. Revit MEP makes it easy for you to alter the design and have changes reflected in all associated areas (plan views.Elevation View Element: When creating a project. top of wall. section views. they are implied by what you do and how you draw. The context is determined by how you draw the component and the constraint relationships that are established with other components. For example. Understanding the following terms is crucial to understanding the software. and types. Revit MEP elements are designed to be created and modified by you directly. Categories of annotation elements include tags and symbols. such as roofs. and so forth). you use levels to define a vertical height or story within a structure. Often. In other cases. and drawings of the design. However. This information includes components used to design the model. You create a level for each known story or other needed reference of the building. Understanding Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 terms Most of the terms used to identify objects in Revit MEP are common. you can define new parametric elements in Revit MEP. The project file contains all information for the building design. the elements determine their behavior largely from their context in the structure. Most often. some terms are unique to Revit MEP. or bottom of foundation. programming is not required. Revit MEP classifies elements by categories. By using a single project file. you can explicitly control them. you add Revit MEP parametric building elements to the design. from geometry to construction data. Having only one file to track also makes it easier to manage the project. you must be in a section or elevation view. families. Category: A category is a group of elements that you use to model or document a building design. views of the project. Level: Levels are infinite horizontal planes that act as a reference for level-hosted elements.This implementation provides flexibility for designers. To place levels. the project is the single database of information for your design—the building information model. first floor. Project: In Revit MEP. categories of model elements include mechanical equipment and air terminals. by locking a dimension or aligning to walls. you do nothing to establish these relationships. industry-standard terms familiar to most engineers. for example. Understanding the Concepts | 9 . elevation views. North . schedules.

You can use the predefined types to generate new types that belong to this family within the project. There are 3 kinds of families: ■ Loadable families can be loaded into a project and created from family templates. you can set the ribbon to one of the three display settings for optimum use of the interface. each in-place family contains only a single type. and wires. Using the Revit MEP User Interface Revit MEP is a powerful CAD product for the Microsoft® Windows operating system. 10 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . Instance: Instances are the actual items (individual elements) that are placed in the project and have specific locations in the design (model instances) or on a drawing sheet (annotation instances). Different elements in a family may have different values for some or all properties. You can create multiple in-place families in your projects. and rearranging interface components to support the way that you work. Unlike system and standard component families. but the set of properties—their names and meaning—is the same. identical use. Then experiment with them. such as default aligned or default angular style for dimensions. or layer the views to see only the one on top. pipes. you can change the interface to better support the way that you work. you cannot duplicate in-place family types to create multiple types. For example.Family: Families are classes of elements in a category. A type can be a specific size of a family. hiding. the behavior of a plumbing fitting is predefined in the system. You can determine the set of properties and the graphical representation of the family. a lighting fixture could be considered one family. and you can place copies of the same in-place family element in your projects. For example. such as a 30” X 42” title block. A type can also be a style. However. Its interface resembles those of other products for Windows featuring a ribbon that contains the tools used to complete tasks. ■ ■ In-place families are custom families that you create in the context of a project. Parts of the Revit Interface The Revit MEP interface is designed to simplify your workflow. Create an in-place family when your project needs unique geometry that you do not expect to reuse or geometry that must maintain one of more relationships to other project geometry. and similar graphical representation. you can create different types of fittings with different compositions. For example. Type: Each family can have several types. System families include ducts. Read the following topics to familiarize yourself with the basic parts of the Revit interface. ■ Because in-place families are intended for limited use in a project. ■ ■ ■ Revit MEP predefines the set of properties and the graphical representation of system families. You can also display several project views at one time. They are not available for loading or creating as separate files. although the pendant lights that compose the family come in different sizes and materials. A family groups elements with a common set of parameters (properties). System families can be transferred between projects. With a few clicks. showing.

Minimize to Tabs: Shows tab labels. click the Return Panels to Ribbon button. and provides all the tools necessary to create your file. Ribbon Tabs and Panels TIP When you see a button that shows a line dividing it into two sides. The ribbon can be minimized for maximum use of the drawing area. To return the panel to the ribbon. To move panels: ■ ■ Click a panel label and drag the panel to a desired place on the ribbon. Click a panel label and drag the panel off the ribbon to the desktop. Minimize to Panel Tiles: Shows tab and panel labels. you can click the top (or left) side to access the tool you probably use most often. Click the other side to expose a list of other related tools. or moving a panel off the ribbon to your desktop.Ribbon Overview The ribbon displays automatically when you create or open a file. Parts of the Revit Interface | 11 . To minimize the ribbon 1 Click (Show Full Ribbon) to the right of the ribbon tabs. 2 The minimize behavior cycles through the following minimize options: ■ ■ ■ Show Full Ribbon: Shows entire ribbon. Customize the ribbon by changing the panel order. or drag the panel back to its original ribbon tab.

and settings. The Add-Ins tab is enabled only when a third-party tool is installed. data and systems. and for switching views. many of the tools you need to create and modify a family of elements. many of the tools you need to create the MEP design. tools used for adding 2D information to a design. There are a number of button types on the ribbon Ribbon Tab Home Includes commands for.Examples of button that can be clicked on two sides The following table describes the ribbon tabs and the types of commands they contain.. architect-specific tools. and CAD files.. tools to add and manage secondary items such as raster images. Create (family files only) Insert Annotate Modify Analyze Architect Collaborate View Manage Add-Ins 12 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . tools used for running analysis on the current design. When working on the Modify tab. project and system parameters. third-party tools used with Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. then select what you want to modify. tools for collaboration with internal and external project team members. tools used for editing existing elements. select the tool first. tools used for managing and modifying the current view.

This contextual ribbon tab closes once you end the command. displays information related to the current state of a Revit operation. The application frame consists of five main areas described in the following table: Application Window Tool Description opens the application menu (single -click). Application Frame Overview The application frame contains tools and provides feedback to help you manage your Revit MEP projects. displays frequently used tools. a special contextual ribbon tab displays that contains a set of tools that relate only to the context of the command. when adding duct. provides requested information. By default. A dialog-launcher arrow on the bottom of a panel opens a dialog. Element: contains Element Properties and the Type Selector. Contextual Ribbon Tabs When you execute certain commands or select an element. To keep a panel expanded. a Place Duct contextual tab displays that has three panels: ■ ■ ■ Selection: contains the Modify command. click the push pin icon in the bottom-left corner of the expanded panel. Placement Tools: contains the placement tools necessary for placing and connecting duct. application button application menu Quick Access toolbar InfoCenter Status Bar Parts of the Revit Interface | 13 .Expanded Panels A drop-down arrow at the bottom of a panel indicates that you can expand the panel to display additional tools and controls. an expanded panel closes automatically when you click another panel. provides access to common tools. closes the application menu (double-click). For example.

. Click to access the application menu and perform the following actions: to. (New) 14 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics .. such as Export and Publish. (Save As) export the current drawing. select a file to open.. NOTE Revit MEP options are set from Options on the application menu.The Application Menu The application menu provides access to many common file actions and also allows you to manage your files using more advanced commands. (Open) save the current drawing. Access common tools to start or publish a file in the application menu. click.. select a template and create a new drawing. (Save) save the current drawing with a new name. (Export) On the application menu.

annotation. (Licensing) close the file. but is not enabled by default. (Save) (Undo) (Redo) (Modify) (Synchronize and Modify Settings) (3D View) (Customize Quick Access Toolbar) Parts of the Revit Interface | 15 .. synchronizes a local file with that on the central server. (Print) access product and license information. (Close) Using the Quick Access Toolbar The Quick Access toolbar contains the following items by default: Quick Access Toolbar Item (Open) Description opens a project. to. provides views including Default 3D. publish the current project. (Publish) print the current drawing. or template file. cancels the last action by default and displays a list of all actions taken during the session. and Walkthrough. family. enters selection mode and ends the current operation... family. click. click next to it on the Customize Quick Access Toolbar drop-down. annotation.. Camera. saves a current project. NOTE New displays on the Customize Quick Access Toolbar drop-down.On the application menu. or template file. reinstates the last cancelled action and displays a list of all reinstated actions performed during the session. To enable or disable a tool item. customizes the items displayed on the Quick Access toolbar.

However. the Status Bar displays the name of the family and type. Clear the Status Bar check mark. Exclude Options: Filters selections to exclude components that are part of a design option. The Quick Access toolbar can display below the ribbon. NOTE There are some tools on contextual tabs that cannot be added to the Quick Access toolbar. Click Show Below the Ribbon on the Customize Quick Access Toolbar to change the display setting. Several other controls appear on the right side of the Status Bar ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Press & Drag: Allows you to click and drag an element without it selecting first. items that are added to the Quick Access toolbar from the Create. these items do not display and need to be re-added to the Quick Access toolbar.To undo or redo a series of operations. To hide the Status Bar. a tool tip appears next to the cursor. or View Graphics panels persist on the toolbar for that mode. Group. repeat the command. you can select any number of previous commands to include in the Undo or Redo operation. Editable Only: Filters selections to select only editable. Starting with the most recent command. Clipboard. check the Status Bar. displaying the same information. While in an edit mode (such as Modify Electrical Fixtures). 16 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . It often displays tips or hints about what to do next for the current command. Active Only: Filters selections to select only active design option components. click the drop-down to the right of the Undo and Redo buttons. when you switch to another editing mode. Filter button: Displays how many elements are selected and refines the element categories selected in a view. or the Family Editor. When you are highlighting an element or component. Getting Hints About What to Do Next If you start a command (such as Rotate) and are not sure what to do next. click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down. Modify. This displays the command history in a list. When you are using a command. Status Bar The Status Bar is located along the bottom of the Revit MEP application frame. In addition. To show the Status Bar again. the left side of the Status Bar provides tips or hints on what to do. workshared components.

Its contents change depending on the current function or selected elements. Then use the Type Selector to select the desired type. On the Quick Access toolbar. It provides quick access to functions that affect the drawing area.To cancel or exit the current command. Place a Wall. including the following: Parts of the Revit Interface | 17 . To change existing elements to a different type. select one or more elements of the same category. for example. When you place an element in a drawing. Its contents change depending on the current command or selected element. Type Selector The Type Selector is located on the Element panel for the currently invoked tool. click (Modify). Options Bar The Options Bar is located below the ribbon. use the Type Selector to specify the type of element to add. View Control Bar The View Control Bar is located at the bottom of the Revit window above the Status Bar. do either of the following: ■ ■ Press ESC twice.

In the following steps. Crop View On/Off Show/Hide Crop Region Temporary Hide/Isolate Reveal Hidden Elements Modifying the View In this exercise. For example. it will be easier to work in Revit MEP and focus on the lessons of each tutorial. There are several ways to access zoom options. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog.) The zoom menu lists the zoom options.■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Scale Detail Level Model Graphics Style Shadows On/Off Show/Hide Rendering Dialog (Available only when the drawing area displays a 3D view. click Training Files. Understanding how to adjust the view will make it easier to work with the MEP design in the window. (The Navigation bar is located in the top-right corner of the view. After you are familiar with these tasks. 1 Click ➤ Open. you may be asked to zoom to a specific region of a view or to zoom to fit the entire structure or floor plan in the view.rvt. you are instructed to use a zoom command to adjust the viewable area in the window. 18 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . you open a training file and practice adjusting the view with the different zoom commands. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_08_i. you learn how to modify the views within your Revit MEP project. The 3D isometric view displays: 3 Click Navigation bar ➤ Zoom In Region drop-down to display the zoom menu. Zoom the view In the tutorials.

NOTE Clicking the Zoom icon itself activates the currently-selected zoom command. When you release the mouse button. If you do not have a wheel mouse. In the drawing area. click . 8 If you use a mouse that has a wheel as the middle button. The cursor becomes a magnifying glass. on the Navigation bar. 5 Click Zoom To Fit. 6 Click in the drawing area. you can roll the wheel to zoom the view. NOTE As you zoom in and out. the view zooms in on the selected area. To modify or add snap increments. Use the wheel mouse to zoom out to see the entire structure again. the view zooms out from the mechanical piping design. 4 Click Zoom Out (2x). The view of the MEP design is sized to fit the available window. use a zoom menu command to zoom out. and enter the shortcut ZR to zoom in on a region. 9 To display SteeringWheels. SteeringWheels provide 2D and 3D navigation tools. 7 Click the upper left corner and lower right corner of the region to magnify. Zoom is also available using SteeringWheels. click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Snaps. Modifying the View | 19 . Revit MEP uses the largest snap increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. this is referred to as a crossing selection. NOTE If the Navigation bar is not currently displayed click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down and select Navigation bar.

20 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . click the SteeringWheels tab. and click tin the Options dialog. Reorient the view You can use the View Cube in 3D views to spin the design or reorient the view 15 Place the mouse cursor over the South compass portion of the ViewCube to highlight the direction indicator. and then using the Zoom tool again. moving the wheel to the desired location.The Full Navigation wheel displays in the drawing area. press ESC. 10 Move the cursor over the Zoom wedge of the wheel so that it highlights. 13 Drag the cursor up or right to zoom in. To define settings for SteeringWheels. As you move the mouse. 11 Click and hold the mouse button. 14 To exit the wheel. 12 Drag the cursor down or left to zoom out. The cursor displays a pivot point for the Zoom tool. Click and drag to orbit the design. For more information about SteeringWheels. ➤ Options. click 16 Click the Top compass direction indicator to switch to a Top view of the design. the wheel follows the cursor around the drawing area. You can change the pivot point by releasing the mouse button. press F1 while the steering wheel is displayed.

2 Enter ZR. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .17 Click the Home icon to return to the original view. referred to as shape handles. Notice the small blue dots that display at both ends of the duct. you learn to perform some of the common Revit MEP tasks that are included in the tutorials. and open Level 2 . it will be easier to work in Revit MEP and focus on the lessons of each tutorial. Performing Common Tasks In this exercise. it is important to understand how to adjust the size of components in the drawing area. Resize an element using drag controls 1 In the Project Browser.Design. bottoms. zoom in on the upper-left corner of the floor plan. Small blue dots. After you are familiar with these tasks. These are the drag controls. display at the ends of selected objects in a plan view. called drag controls.Design ➤ Floor Plans. When drawing or modifying an MEP design. as shown.HVAC Plan . Similar controls. display along the ends. and tops of selected elements in elevation views and 3D views. and select the duct. Performing Common Tasks | 21 .

Move an element 7 Select the same duct used in the previous steps. you decide that you prefer to leave the duct as is. All changes you make to a project are tracked. click the drop-down menu next to (Undo).3 Click and drag the bottom control. Selecting the second item in the list will undo the last 2 actions. or press CTRL+Z. click the Undo command. In this example. 4 Click in the drawing area to deselect the duct. 6 On the Undo menu. moving the cursor up to shorten the duct. on the Standard toolbar. NOTE To quickly undo the previous action. Undo commands 5 On the Quick Access toolbar. The Undo command allows you to reverse the effects of one or more commands. 22 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . All commands are canceled up to and including the selected command. select the first item in the list. Move.

Performing Common Tasks | 23 . Some commands. 10 Move the cursor to the right. you want to move the duct. The duct is moved to the new position.8 Click Modify Ducts tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move. 9 Click the midpoint of the duct. 11 With the duct already selected. and click again to specify the ending position. After selecting the element to move. require 2 clicks to complete the command. Another way to move an element is to select it and drag it to a new location. and drag it to the left as shown. click to specify the starting position. In this case. such as Move and Copy. as shown. for example.

such as the Modify Ducts command. you can specify visibility settings for specific elements in an HVAC plan in order to enable the display of supply duct and disable the display of return duct.Supply. Press ESC twice. 12 Click Modify tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify.End a command Some commands.Return. Click OK. For example. (Undo) to redisplay the 24 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . you can also: ■ ■ Choose another command. click the drop-down menu next to supply return air duct. Override the display of objects You can control the visibility of objects in a view to display objects in specific ways. 16 On the Quick Access toolbar. Notice that the return air duct is not displayed. Select Mechanical . stay active or current until you choose another command or end the current command. under Visibility: ■ ■ ■ Clear Mechanical . 15 On the Filters tab of the Visibility/Graphics Override dialog. 14 Enter VG. 13 To end a command.

17 Close the file without saving your changes. Performing Common Tasks | 25 .

26 .

You can choose from several templates. and click Open. you learn how to organize the project browser to make it easy to view and access your project files. click Training files. the default building levels and standard views.rte template. use copy/monitor. and open Imperial ➤ Templates. You can either select a template from the template library. In that case. under Create new. Start a project from an existing template 1 Click ➤ New ➤ Project. The template selection may vary depending on your installation. Finally. create and manage views. 2 In the New Project dialog. such as ducts and pipes. you learn how to start a project from a template. you can modify one template and use Transfer Project Standards to copy the changes to the other templates. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. You may need to have a variety of office templates if your work requires it. and modify system settings. or you can save a project and use it as a new project template. and geometry from the starting template.Getting Started with MEP Projects 3 In this lesson you learn how to start a project from a template. and loadable families. settings. You then learn how to customize the template by modifying the project settings and discipline settings. click Browse. Creating an MEP Project In this exercise. system families. link files. New projects inherit all the families. A project template enables you to start a project by providing initial conditions. The first step in creating your office template is deciding which template to use as your starting point. 27 . You also learn how to use collaboration tools. such as coordination review and interference checking. 4 Select the i_Tutorial-Default. such as the default project units and settings. 6 Click OK. select Project. under Template file. 5 In the New Project dialog.

11 Close the file with or without saving it. expand Views (all) ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation). select Level 1. 15 In the Instance Properties dialog. 8 In the drawing area. create another new project using the Construction template. and open North. click Browse. select Manchester. Click OK twice. Notice that construction template is more complex than the default template and the view properties have been modified to maximize the use of various tools. 13 In the New Project dialog: Under Template file. ■ For Building Construction. click ■ ■ In the Building Construction dialog. 18 In the Project Parameters dialog. for City. Click Cancel. 17 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Parameters. Click OK. 10 Using the same method. select School or University. select Sub-Discipline and click Modify. When you select the material. click Edit. For Location. (Browse). Modify project settings Project settings control the appearance of components and their subcomponents within a project. you can establish settings that are common to most projects. 28 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . review the construction materials listed. select Project template. click (Browse). Create a new project template based on the default systems template 12 Click ■ ■ ➤ New ➤ Project. NH. you can select it now. you can select the materials commonly used in most projects. If you want to use a template other than the default. Some templates are simple with respect to the predefined views and schedules. ■ ■ Under Create new. under Energy Analysis. For example. ■ ■ For Ground Plane. you can dictate its appearance in all views and when rendered. 16 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Building Type. navigate to Imperial Templates. 14 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Information. zoom to right side of the drawing area to view the level heads.rte template and click Open. To maintain office standards and reduce rework. In the Choose Template dialog. and select the Systems-Default_Imperial. TIP This template is the starting point for your new template.7 In the Project Browser. 9 Close the file with or without saving it. In the Manage Place and Locations dialog: ■ On the Place tab. for Energy Data.

ensure that Long Wire Tick Mark is selected. ensure that Hook Wire Tick Mark is selected. 32 In the right pane: ■ ■ ■ For Hot Wire Tick Mark. click Sizes. select I_Hook Wire Tick Mark. Define the tick marks that are used on wires by loading a family. click Rectangular. 5 1/2". Click OK twice. under Duct Settings. 30 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Electrical Settings. 4 1/2". plumbing. piping. ensure that Long Wire Tick Mark is selected. select Identity Data. Modify electrical settings Electrical settings determine the voltage. 31 In the left pane of the Electrical Settings dialog. they can be configured in a template file to avoid having to set them for each project. for 3/4". 28 Click Insert tab ➤ Load from Library panel ➤ Load Family. and demand factors for electrical systems. clear the check boxes under the Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing columns. 29 In the Load Family dialog: ■ ■ Browse to the Imperial Library ➤ Electrical Components ➤ TickMarks folder.19 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Group parameter under. clear the check boxes under the Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing columns.rfa and I_Long Wire Tick Mark. 27 Click OK. select Views. 22 In the right pane. 10 1/2". Creating an MEP Project | 29 . for 3 1/2". 25 In the left pane. click Wiring. clear the check boxes under the Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing columns. For Ground Wire Tick Mark. After standard settings have been established for an organization. 11 1/2". For Neutral Wire Tick Mark.rfa and click Open. and 12 1/2". Discipline settings can be defined for electrical and mechanical disciplines. For Categories. for 3 1/2". under Pipe Settings. 23 In the left pane. 20 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Mechanical Settings. and 5 1/2". 4 1/2". power distribution systems. under Duct Settings. Modify mechanical settings Revit MEP has discipline settings that define the appearance and behavior of the system components in a project. 24 In the right pane. Holding CTRL. 33 Click OK. 21 In the left pane of the Mechanical Settings dialog. Duct sizes that are not commonly used are removed from the sizing lists to avoid having them created when sizing or laying out ducts. click Round. 26 In the right pane. wiring. and fire protection systems. Mechanical settings determine the behavior and appearance of the ductwork and piping for mechanical.

To enable this coordination. click Browse. In addition. select Associated Level. For Then by. and groups that are contained in a project. From the Positioning list. 3 Select the template you saved in the previous exercise and click Open. select Project. and adjust the display settings of the Revit Architecture project. click Training. Notice that the file is saved as a template. Click Open. 35 On the Views tab of the Browser Organization dialog. 38 Close the file. select Family and Type. You can use these techniques to create templates that are customized to your projects. select Sub-Discipline. you link a Revit Architecture project to a Revit MEP project. Linking Projects In this exercise. An architect has created a preliminary architectural model for a building project using Revit Architecture. sheets. You can also set filters to determine the number of views and sheets that are displayed. 4 In the New Project dialog. select Type/Discipline and click Edit. 36 On the Folders tab of the Browser Organization Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Group by. select Auto . Close coordination between the two models is essential because the building envelope changes will directly affect the MEP design. you link the architectural model with the MEP model. 30 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . For Then by. you can specify the order in which the views and sheets are displayed in the Project Browser. under Template file.Origin to Origin. Link a file 6 Click Insert tab ➤ Link panel ➤ Link Revit. families.rvt. 37 Save this file to a location on your local system. 34 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down and click Browser Organization. 5 Click OK. Select Ascending Click OK twice. select View Name. Create a new project using the template created in the previous lesson 1 Click ➤ New ➤ Project. under Create new. synchronize the two models for monitoring changes.Organize the Project Browser The Project Browser lists all the views. You need to create the MEP model for the project. 7 In the Import/Link RVT dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. For Sort by. Select Imperial\Arch Link Model_i. 2 In the New Project dialog. You can customize the organization of project views and sheets in the Project Browser to group them into folders.

The architectural model links to the MEP model and the current view remains active. 8 If necessary, reposition elevations in the plan view as shown.

Enable bounding elements for spaces 9 In the drawing area, select the linked architectural model. 10 Click Modify RVT Links tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. 11 In the Type Properties dialog, under Constraints, select Room Bounding. 12 Click OK. 13 Press ESC to deselect the linked model. Add levels 14 Expand Views (Type/Discipline) ➤ HVAC ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation) ➤ ??? and open North - Mech. 15 Zoom to the right side of the building to view the levels.

Linking Projects | 31

16 Click Architect tab ➤ Levels & Grids panel ➤ Level. 17 On the Options Bar, click Plan View types. 18 In the Plan View Types dialog, verify that Ceiling Plan and Floor Plan are selected and click OK. 19 On the left side of the view, click the level line for 03- Floor. 20 Move the cursor to the right side of the view and click to insert the level line for Mechanical 3. 21 Repeat the previous steps to create another level line for the roof. 22 Click Place Level tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. Adjust level lines You can adjust the level lines in the MEP design to match the level lines in the architectural model. 23 Select the level line for Level 2 and click the value.

24 Enter 12 and press ENTER. 25 Repeat the previous steps to adjust the level line for Level 2.

32 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects

Monitor the architectural levels You can monitor the elements within a Revit MEP model, and when the monitored elements are not synchronized, warnings notify you of any violations. These violations happen when the original monitored element from the linked project has changed, a copied monitored element in the host project has changed, or both original monitored and copied elements have changed. Warnings may also appear when the original element in the linked file is deleted or the copied element in the host file is deleted. Using the Copy/Monitor tool, you can copy elements within a current project or from a linked project to a host project. This establishes a relationship between the copied and original elements, which helps monitor changes to the original element and report differences. After copying, appears above the copied elements, indicating that a relationship is established, and that the copied elements are monitored. If you modify a monitored element, a warning message displays, indicating that an element has changed. 26 Click Collaborate tab ➤ Coordinate panel ➤ Copy/Monitor drop-down ➤ Select Link. 27 In the drawing area, highlight the linked model, and click to select the linked model. The Copy/Monitor tab is displayed. 28 Click Copy/Monitor tab ➤ Tools panel ➤ Monitor. 29 In the drawing area, click the MEP level line labeled Level 1, then click the architectural model level line labeled 01-Entry Level. appears and the monitor tool ensures that both level lines remain coordinated. 30 Repeat the previous steps to monitor the level lines for level 2, level 3, and the level 4. 31 On the Copy/Monitor tab, click Finish to exit the Copy/Monitor tool. Disable the display of architectural levels 32 Click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 33 On the Revit Links tab of the Visibility/Graphics Override dialog, for the link file, click By Host View. 34 On the Basics tab, of the RVT Link Display Settings dialog, click Custom. 35 On the Annotation Categories tab:

For Annotation Categories, select Custom.

Linking Projects | 33

■ ■ ■

Select Show categories from all disciplines. Under Visibility, deselect Levels. Click OK.

36 Click OK.

Creating and Applying a View Template
In this exercise, you create a view template and apply it to your project template. Create a view template 1 Click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ View Templates drop-down ➤ Create template from current view. 2 In the New View Template dialog, for Name, enter Mechanical View and click OK. 3 In the View templates dialog, under View Properties, for V/G Overrides RVT Links, click Edit. 4 On the Revit Links tab of the Visibility Graphics Override dialog, for the link file, click Custom. 5 On the Basics tab, of the RVT Link Display Settings dialog, click Custom. 6 On the Model Categories tab:
■ ■ ■ ■

For Model Categories, select Custom. Select Show categories from all disciplines. Under Visibility, deselect Parking, Planting, Roads, Site, and Topography. Click OK.

7 Click OK twice. Apply a view template 8 In the Project Browser, right-click Views (Type/Discipline) ➤ HVAC ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation) ➤ ??? ➤ North - Mechanical and click Apply View Template.

34 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects

9 In the Apply View Template dialog, under View Templates, select Mechanical and click OK.

10 Close the file with or without saving your changes.

Modifying System Settings
In this exercise, you learn how to control the system settings for Revit MEP. System settings are local to each computer and applied to all projects; they are not saved to project files or template files.

Modifying General System Options
In this exercise, you modify the settings that control your local Revit MEP working environment. These settings control the graphics, selection default options, notification preferences, journal cleanup options, and your username when using worksharing. Set graphics settings 1 Click ➤ Options.

2 In the Options dialog, click the Graphics tab. 3 Under Colors, select Invert background color, and click OK. 4 Click ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new project.

5 In the New Project dialog, under Template file, click Browse. 6 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\Templates\i_Tutorial_Default.rte. 7 Click OK. Notice that the drawing area is black. 8 Click ➤ Options.

9 In the Options dialog, click the Graphics tab.

Modifying System Settings | 35

10 Under Colors, click the value for Selection color. 11 In the Color dialog, select yellow, and click OK. NOTE You can also specify the Alert Color. When an error occurs, the elements causing the error display using this color. 12 Click the General tab. 13 Under Notifications, specify the following options:
■ ■

For Save reminder interval, select One hour. For Tooltip assistance, select None.

14 Click OK. 15 Click Architect tab ➤ Build panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Wall. 16 Sketch a straight horizontal wall in the center of the drawing area. 17 Press ESC to end the command. 18 Select the wall.

Notice the selected wall is yellow rather than the default red. 19 Press ESC to end the command. 20 Place the cursor over the wall but do not select it. Notice that a tooltip is not displayed. However, the Status Bar displays information about the highlighted element. 21 Close the file without saving it.

Specifying File Locations
In this exercise, you specify default file locations. These settings control locations of important Revit MEP files, including your default project template, family template files, and family libraries. Set file locations 1 Click ➤ Options.

2 In the Options dialog, click the File Locations tab. 3 Under Default template file, click Browse.

36 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects

Notice that you can choose an industry-specific template as your default template.

TIP To view a template, you can start a new project with that template. Click and click Browse to select a template. 4 Click Cancel. 5 Under Default path for user files, click Browse.

➤ New ➤ Project,

6 In the Browse For Folder dialog, select the folder to save your files to by default, and click Open. 7 In the Options dialog, under Default path for family template files, click Browse. This path is set automatically during the installation process. These are the family templates that you use to create new families. It is unlikely that you would ever want to modify this path. However, there are some circumstances where you may need to modify the path, such as in a large, centralized, MEP firm where customized templates reside on a network drive. 8 Click Cancel. Specify library settings and create a new library 9 In the Options dialog, click Places. 10 In the Places dialog, note the list of library names. The list is dependent on the options that you selected during installation. Each library path points Revit MEP to a folder of families or training files. You can modify the existing library names and path, and you can create new libraries. An icon for each library displays in the left pane of all Revit MEP Open, Save, Load, and Import dialogs.

When you are opening, saving, or loading a Revit MEP file, you can click on the library folder located in the left pane of the dialog. In the following illustration, notice that the libraries display as icons in the left pane of the dialog.

Specifying File Locations | 37

and click OK twice. Load. click the My Library icon. and click (Browse).11 In the Places dialog. The new library displays in the left pane of all Revit MEP Open. and change the name to My Library. click My Library. 38 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . and Import dialogs. and click Open. 14 Navigate to C:\My Documents or a folder where you want to create a personal library of Revit MEP projects. 16 Click 17 Click (Move Rows Up) until My Library is at the top of the list. and select it as the library path. ➤ Open. 18 In the left pane of the Open dialog. or families. 13 Click in the Library Path field for My Library. TIP You may want to create a new folder first. The library icons display in the order in which they are listed in the Options dialog. click (Add Value). templates. Save. 12 Click in the Library Name field of the new library. 15 Under Library Name.

custom color files. If you work in a large office. 5 In the text editor. It allowed SHTMTL-CU because you set the spelling options to ignore words in uppercase. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. 3 Under Settings. 26 Under Render Appearance Library Location. 19 Click Cancel. Specifying Spelling Options | 39 . 9 In the text editor. Notice that the spell checker allowed sheetmtl-Cu because you added it to the custom dictionary. view the current path. and enter This is sheetmtl-Cu and SHTMTL-CU. 13 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. 23 Click 24 Click OK. 10 Click File menu ➤ Exit. 8 Under Building industry dictionary. specify the new location here. and decal image files. click Edit. 22 Select My Library. such as bump maps. 15 Click Annotate tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. select Ignore words in uppercase. you modify the spelling settings and the custom dictionaries for Revit MEP. click the Spelling tab. (Remove Value) to delete the library.Notice that Revit MEP navigates directly to the library path. Specifying Spelling Options In this exercise. 7 Click File menu ➤ Exit. 2 In the Options dialog. 6 Click File menu ➤ Save. enter sheetmtl-Cu. 20 Click ➤ Options. If you want to relocate this path. Specify rendering settings 25 Click the Rendering tab. This path specifies the location of the Render Appearance Library. click Edit. 16 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Spelling. 27 Click OK. you can specify the locations of other files used to define render appearances. This path is determined during installation. 21 On the File Locations tab. 12 Create a new project using the default template. click Places. 11 In the Options dialog. scroll down to view the list of building industry terms. Modify spelling settings 1 Click ➤ Options. you may want to set up an office library on a network path to increase productivity and maintain office standards. 14 Click in the drawing area. 4 Under Personal dictionary contains words added during spell check. Under Additional Render Appearance Paths. click OK.

19 In the Options dialog. As you zoom in and out within a view.. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. click Restore Defaults. click Close. click Training Files. 4 In the New Project dialog.17 In the Spelling dialog. 25 Close the file without saving it.rte. Modify snap increments 1 Click ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new Revit MEP project. 2 In the New Project dialog. You can turn snap settings on and off. Modifying Snap Settings In this exercise. click Edit. This command resets the spelling settings to their original configuration. Notice that you can modify both length and angular snap increments. 40 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . 23 In the text editor. click OK. you modify snap increments. click File menu ➤ Save. work with snapping turned off. 6 In the Snaps dialog. 20 Under Settings. 5 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Snaps. 22 In the text editor. click OK. Revit MEP uses the largest increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. 18 Click ➤ Options. or use the shortcut keys to force a particular snap method. and then click File menu ➤ Exit. click the Spelling tab. you modify snap settings. and use shortcut keys to control snapping on an instance basis. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. 24 In the Options dialog. click Browse. 21 Under Personal dictionary. and enter 1 . under Template file. delete sheetmtl-CU. click in the Length dimension snap increments box following the value 4’ . Snap settings are system settings that are applied to all projects and not saved within a project file. under Dimension Snaps. In this exercise. You can add an increment by entering the value with a semicolon after it. and open Imperial\Templates\i_Tutorial_Default.

deselect Chain. you can right-click and select a zoom option from the shortcut menu. such as ZO to zoom out. After you click to place the object at the midpoint. For example. A listening dimension refers to the dimension that displays while you are sketching. zoom in until the listening dimension snap increment shifts to 1’. notice the 2-letter acronyms next to each object snap option. click OK. enter the shortcut key SO to turn snaps off. This dimension reacts to the movement of the cursor and numerical keyboard entries. 9 Click Architect tab ➤ Build panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Wall. and only midpoint snaps are recognized until you commit an action.7 Under Object Snaps. While sketching. use the wheel button on your mouse. Notice that when snapping is turned off completely. Modifying Snap Settings | 41 . 11 Click in the center of the drawing area. the listening dimension reflects the exact length of the wall as you move the cursor to the left or right. You can use these shortcut keys at any time when working on the design. zoom out until it does so. TIP To zoom while sketching. If you do not have a wheel button. If it does not. This is the increment that you added previously. snapping reverts to the system default settings. Notice that the listening dimension snaps at 4’ increments. Sketch without snapping 13 While sketching the wall. enter SM. if you want to snap an object to a wall midpoint. 10 On the Options Bar. 12 While sketching a generic straight wall. you can also use the zoom shortcut keys. 8 In the Snaps dialog. and move the cursor to the right.

15 Click in the drawing area to start a second wall. Notice that snapping is once again active. 21 Click to start the wall at the midpoint. with or without saving it. 24 Under Dimension Snaps. 25 Click OK. click in the Length dimension snap increments box. and specify the wall endpoint. When you use shortcut keys to control snapping. the command is only active for one click of the mouse. If you move the cursor along the wall. and the wall edges. Do not set the wall end point. Notice that the cursor snaps to various points on the wall. 22 Move the cursor downward.14 Click to set the wall endpoint. 42 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . 23 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Snaps. Use snapping shortcut keys 16 Click Place Wall tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. This is the snap shortcut key that restricts all snapping to midpoints. 20 Notice that the cursor now snaps only to the midpoint of the wall. the midpoint. 17 Click Architect tab ➤ Build panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Wall. Make sure you also delete the semicolon. it will snap to the endpoints. and delete the value 1’ .. and move the cursor to the right. 18 Place the cursor over the horizontal wall you added previously. 26 Close the file. 19 Enter SM.

You also learn how to design a mechanical air system and a mechanical piping system.Creating a Mechanical System In this tutorial. 43 . you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan mechanical systems.

44 .

you prepare a floor plan so that you can place spaces in later exercises. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided training file. you first configure the linked architectural model. you design a mechanical system for an office building. This system consists of a cooling tower. Preparing Spaces Spaces allow you to calculate the volume of the areas in the building. Then you assign zones to the spaces in order to control the spatial environment. They contain information about the locations in which they are placed. you will understand the process. and specific techniques for designing mechanical systems. you can choose to save your work. you begin planning the system by placing spaces in the building. you first plan the system. methodology. You can search this directory to verify that the training files have been downloaded. After finishing each exercise. The goal of this tutorial is to teach you to design a mechanical system using Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. This workflow begins with system planning and concludes with system designing. Because most MEP engineers work with a linked model during system design. 45 . If the tutorial training files are not present. In this lesson.autodesk. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. you perform a heating and cooling loads analysis to determine the heating and cooling requirements for the building. This information is used for heating and cooling loads analysis. By following the recommended workflow. However. As you create the mechanical system. To create a mechanical system in Revit MEP. After applying a color scheme to the zones. go to http://www. At the end of the tutorial. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. water source heat pump (WSHP). duct system and a hydronic piping system. you follow a series of lessons and exercises that teach the recommended system design workflow for Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. and then you create a plenum level.Planning Mechanical Systems 4 In this tutorial. In this exercise.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. The training files that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training Files ➤ Imperial directory. you learn best practices for system design while understanding how Revit MEP makes systems design more efficient.

and floors) recognized as boundaries for spaces. and ceiling) are defined as room-bounding. you configure a linked model in order to begin designing systems in it. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . indicating that it’s the active view. Add a Plenum level You create plenum levels so that you can place spaces in the unoccupied plenum areas (between the ceiling and the floor above) of the building. and click OK.Space Plan is highlighted. This makes the architectural components (such as walls. roof. 2 Place the cursor over the linked model. 1 In the Project Browser. you add a level for plenums. ceilings. 46 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems .Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. NOTE When working with a linked file. select Room Bounding. 3 Click Modify RVT Links tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. These components are defined in the architectural training file. Configure the linked model for space bounding The most common method of designing systems in Revit MEP is to work within a linked architectural building model. The status bar located at the bottom of the window and the tooltip indicate the Linked Revit Model. You must place spaces in all areas (occupied and unoccupied) of the building to create an accurate analytical model and achieve an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_01_i. In this section. 5 Press Esc to clear the selection. 4 In the Type Properties dialog. and after the linked model highlights. make certain that architectural elements (such as walls. click Training Files. not in the MEP training file. under Constraints.rvt. click to select it. Next. The linked model is configured to place spaces using the linked building geometry to define the space volume. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

and a blue datum indicates that a plan view exists for the level. and click OK. ■ 11 Draw a plenum level above Level 2 as follows: ■ ■ Click the left endpoint of the Level 2 line to specify the start point of the plenum level. those categories in the Project Browser are listed as question marks. 14 Double-click the level name (Level 4).MEP. Preparing Spaces | 47 . click 10 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ (Line). and in the Plan View Types dialog. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ MEP . and enter Level 2 Plenum.6 In the Project Browser. The new level is placed. 12 Click Place Level tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 13 Zoom in on the right side of the elevation view. 7 Click Architect tab ➤ Levels & Grids panel ➤ Level. Verify that Make Plan View is selected. 16 Press Esc. click Yes (this will happen every time you create a new level). and select Level : Plenum from the Type Selector drop-down. A black datum indicates a reference level (the level is not taken into account during the creation of a view template). verify that only Floor Plan is selected. For Offset. Click Plan View Types. Because you have not yet specified the view classification or sub-discipline properties. A new plenum floor plan view named Level 2 Plenum is created. and double-click West . Click the right endpoint of the Level 2 line. 9 On the Draw panel. 15 When asked to rename the corresponding level and views. offset by the Offset value (8' 0" ) above level 2. and is listed in the Project Browser under Views (Discipline) ➤ ??? ➤ ??? ➤ Floor Plans.Design ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation). This creates only a floor plan after the level is added. enter 8'. 8 Click Place Level tab ➤ Element panel.

The Level 2 Plenum floor plan is now listed under MEP . You apply the default view template so that only the architectural floor plan displays. select MEP . However. The view graphics are modified based on the template applied. Under Identity Data.Modify plenum properties 17 In the Project Browser. Under View Depth. and click Properties. For Cut plane. select Plenum Plan. select Level Above (Level 3). verify that 1/8" = 1'-0" is selected. This information is used for heating and cooling loads analysis. In this exercise. select Design. and then place spaces in various types of areas. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ ??? ➤ ??? ➤ Floor Plans. Apply a view template 19 Open the Level 2 Plenum view.Plenum. right-click Level 2 Plenum. In this exercise. In the next exercise. They contain information about the locations in which they are placed. Placing Spaces Spaces allow you to calculate the volume of the areas in the building. For View Classification. for View Range. you use space separation lines to create a new fully bounded area. it is highly recommended that you always begin each exercise by opening the training file that Autodesk provides. In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. you can choose to save your work. click Edit. 48 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . you created a plenum level and a corresponding floor plan view in preparation of placing spaces. ■ Click OK twice. for Top. 20 In the Project Browser. for Level. For Sub-Discipline. Under Extents. you place spaces in areas of the building model. and click Apply Default View Template. enter 0. right-click Level 2 Plenum. for Default View Template. for View Scale. and for Offset.Plenum ➤ Floor Plans in the Project Browser. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. enter an Offset of 1' 0". Notice that the site plan displays in the view. NOTE After finishing each exercise. 18 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Graphics. 21 Close the file with or without saving it. verify that Associated Level (Level 2 Plenum) is specified with an offset of 0.

3 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . 2 Zoom to the empty room to the left of the corridor. For Upper Limit.Space Plan is highlighted. indicating that it’s the active view. and ceilings). click Training Files. Spaces can be created automatically and numbered in sequence by using the Create Automatically tool. Placing Spaces | 49 . and select Space Tag With Volume from the Type Selector drop-down. In the left pane of the Open dialog. select Level 2 Plenum. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_02_i. 6 Place the cursor in the room until the space snaps to the room-bounding elements (floor.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. For Space. select Horizontal. ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify that Leader is cleared. walls.rvt. 4 Click Place Space tab ➤ Element panel. enter 0. 5 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Verify that Tag on placement is selected. For (Tag Location). select New. You can also use the Highlight Boundaries feature to view boundary elements in the model. For Offset. Place a space 1 In the Project Browser. This specifies the vertical extent of the space.

double-click the section head in the Library to open the section view (Section 26). and click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 50 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . Notice that the space number and name now match the room number and name from the linked architectural file. The software automatically zooms the new view to the same location as in the open view. enter 219. for Number. 9 Select the space.Plenum ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 Plenum. Click OK. enter Library. 13 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Close Hidden. 8 Click Place Space tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. For Name. ■ 11 Press Esc to clear the selection. ensuring coordination between the files. 10 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Identity Data. 14 In the drawing area. Prepare the plenum view 12 Open Design ➤ MEP .7 Click to place the space.

For Upper Limit. Place a space in the plenum 16 Click in the Level 2 Plenum floor plan to activate it. Notice that the space is created in the section view at the same time. 17 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space.15 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. For Offset. 21 Using the method learned previously. 18 Select Space Tag With Volume from the Type Selector drop-down. 19 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ Verify that Tag on placement is selected. select Level 3. change the space name to Plenum and the number to 219P. demonstrating the parametric functionality of the software. Placing Spaces | 51 . enter 0. and then click Modify. 20 Click in the Library to place the space.

23 Click OK. 24 Notice that the floor plan has updated with the changes. Placing a Space in an Open Area In this exercise. This is beneficial to split up large volumes for equipment selection and sizing.22 In the Instance Properties dialog. under Energy Analysis. 52 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . you place a space in a large corridor area. select Plenum and verify that Occupiable is cleared. and then split the space using a space separation line. 25 Close the file with or without saving it.

Place a space in an open area 1 In the Project Browser. verify that Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 .Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_03_i. click Training Files. and then press Esc. 2 Zoom in to the central corridor near the stairs. 5 On the Options Bar. and select Space Tag With Volume from the Type Selector drop-down. Placing a Space in an Open Area | 53 . for Upper Limit. indicating that it’s the active view. 6 Click above the top stair to place the corridor space.Space Plan is highlighted. and for Offset.rvt. select Level 3. enter 0. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. 4 Click Place Space tab ➤ Element panel. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

8 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 54 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . the plan view would have updated with the changes. which was numbered 219Q. If you had modified the name and number in the schedule view instead. change the space number to 216A.7 In the Project Browser. and double-click the title of the plan view to maximize the view. double-click the space name. as shown. 13 To specify the start point of the separation line. In the schedule. open Schedules/Quantities ➤ Space Schedule. and press Enter. notice the corresponding architectural room name and number. 11 Close the schedule view. and notice that the schedule updates with the changes. 12 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space Separator. 10 Using the same method. 9 In the floor plan. enter Corridor. and scroll to the newly placed space. click the endpoint of the lower wall in space Instruction 221. 14 Click perpendicular to the opposite curtain wall to end the horizontal separation line.

18 Close the file with or without saving it.15 Press Esc twice. place a space in the lower area of the split space. Notice the changed boundaries of the corridor space. The new space is numbered correctly (216B). 17 Change the name of the space to Corridor. with an upper limit of Level 3 and an offset of 0. Placing a Space in an Open Area | 55 . 16 Using the method learned previously.

2 Zoom to the chase between the male (226) and female (225) restrooms in the north wing. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_04_i.Placing a Multi-Level Space In this exercise. Shading is a visual indication of where spaces have been placed (shaded) and where they need to be placed (empty). Click in the Male restroom to specify the section endpoint. and place a section in the view as shown: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click in the Cafeteria space to specify the section start point. you place a space in a chase. Use the lower drag control to change the section boundary as shown. If necessary. and change the upper limit to account for the entire volume of the chase. click Training Files. 56 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. In the left pane of the Open dialog. indicating that it’s the active view.rvt. click (Flip Section) to reorient the section.Space Plan is highlighted. Add a multi-level space 1 In the Project Browser. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . 3 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Section.

For Offset. but that the space does not fill the entire chase. 12 Click in the section view. 11 Click Place Space tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 6 Enter VG. for Name. 13 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Constraints. expand Spaces. 9 Zoom each view as necessary in order to view the chase. 10 In the plan view. enter 0. select Level 3. For Limit Offset. and then click OK. right-click. for Upper Limit. 5 Double-click the section head to open the section view. enter 225PC. 7 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics Override dialog. select Interior and Reference. Placing a Multi-Level Space | 57 . For Number. add a space: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. click in the chase area to place the space. Notice that you can see the space in the section view as well as in the plan view. On the Options Bar. In the plan view. and click Element Properties. Under Identity Data. 8 Enter WT to tile the views.4 Press Esc. select the space. ■ ■ 14 Click OK. select Roof Level. enter Chase. enter 4'. for Upper Limit. You enter a value that is above the level of the roof.

20 Close the file with or without saving it. All spaces in the view are tagged. In the next exercises. and roofs) define the extent of space volume used in calculations. and you placed spaces for various types of areas. Tag spaces 16 Open Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . floors. You used space separation lines to create a new fully bounded area that was part of a larger area. select Space Tag With Volume. ceilings. 19 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. you work with zones in order to control the spatial environment and perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis.Bounding elements (such as walls. 15 Press Esc. 17 Type ZF. and maximize the view. 58 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . under Loaded Tags.Space Plan. 18 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag All. and click OK. the space displays the volume up to the roof only. Because the chase space is limited by a bounding element. You have created a plenum level and a corresponding floor plan view.

Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. The different graphics in the System Browser indicate whether a space is occupiable ( unoccupiable ( ). In this exercise. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Zones_01_i. To display space reference lines. click Training Files. indicating that it’s the active view. You can change the Occupiable parameter for each space. 1 In the Project Browser. verify that Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . The System Browser opens and docks to the right of the drawing area. under Spaces. ) or Viewing Zones in the System Browser | 59 . NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the training file to provide a clearer view of the floor plan. The recommended workflow is to add each space to a zone that you create. click Reference.Zoning is highlighted.rvt. on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. Zones allow you to control the spatial environment and to perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. Revit MEP immediately adds them to the Default zone. it is automatically added to the Default zone. which removes the space from the Default zone. After a space is placed in an area. Notice that Default is currently the only zone. click View ➤ Zones. In the left pane of the Open dialog. NOTE A space cannot be placed into an area without being added to a zone. The browser is a hierarchical list of spaces and the zones to which they have been assigned. and verify that All Disciplines is selected. 4 Double-click Default to display a list of the spaces in the building model. 3 Right-click in the System Browser. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser.Viewing Zones in the System Browser After spaces are placed in the building. you view and verify zones in the System Browser.

You work with a single zone until you click Finish. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. verify that Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . double-click 121 Cafeteria.Zoning is highlighted. and Electrical 220 spaces. on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the training file to provide a clearer view of the floor plan. click Reference. Next. and a new zone is created. you assign spaces to a zone. and click Finish Editing Zone. you will use the System Browser to confirm that the spaces are in the new zone. you assign spaces to zones in the building. 4 In the drawing area.5 In the System Browser. The Zone tool is active. indicating that the space is occupiable. and modify the zone properties. Using the Edit Zone tab. under Energy Analysis. select Occupiable. Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces. Creating Zones on a Single Level In this exercise. 60 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Zone. you can add or remove a space from the zone. select Computer Lab 222. To display space reference lines. Assign spaces to a zone 1 In the Project Browser. NOTE The Edit Zone tab provides zone tools and information. As you do this. 3 Click Edit Zone tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Add Space. indicating that it’s the active view. 7 Close the file with or without saving it.rvt. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Zones_02_i. The new zone is listed in the System Browser. the Edit Zone tab displays. and click OK. under Spaces. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 6 In the Instance Properties dialog. and verify the zones in the System Browser. The graphic in the System Browser updates. Instruction 221.

expand the new zone and notice that the Computer Lab. Click OK. Creating Zones on a Single Level | 61 . and then select only Interior Fill and Reference Lines (clear Boundary and Color Fill). To view the zone in the drawing area. and Electrical spaces are added to it (and removed from the Default zone). you need to activate the zone visibility. ■ The new zone displays with color fill and a zone reference line.In the System Browser. 6 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog: ■ ■ Under Visibility. The zone reference line indicates that the 3 spaces are in the zone. 5 With the drawing area active. Instruction. type VG. select HVAC Zones. Expand HVAC Zones.

9 In the System Browser.Zoning is highlighted. To display space reference lines. You activated zone visibility in the views. and verified the zones in both the floor plan views and in the System Browser. NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the training file to provide a clearer view of the floor plan. In the left pane of the Open dialog. The new zone name displays in the System Browser. for Name. expand 2 . 12 Close the file with or without saving it. Creating Zones on Multiple Levels In this exercise. indicating that it’s the active view. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Zones_03_i. on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. under Identity Data. 10 On the Edit Zone tab. 2 Zoom in to Lounge 215 (to the right of the central stairs).West . Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces. enter 2 . and click OK. click Training Files.Area B to confirm that the 3 spaces are in it. 3 Open Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . you can drag the zone reference line to relocate it and better view the spaces that are in the zone. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.rvt. Create a zone for spaces on multiple levels 1 In the Project Browser.Area B. 4 Enter WT to tile the 2 windows. and verify the zone in the System Browser. click Reference. 62 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems .TIP After you finish editing the zone. 11 Close the System Browser. Rename the zone 7 Select the zone. In this exercise. you assign spaces on multiple levels to a zone in the building.West . under Spaces. verify that Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 .Zoning. you assigned zones to spaces that were on the same level of the building. and then click Modify HVAC Zones tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Zone Properties. click Finish Editing Zone.

5 Click in the Level 1 . 6 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Zone. 13 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ Verify that Leader is selected. 12 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 9 With the Add Space tool active. select Lounge 120 to add it to the zone. Select Attached End.Zoning view. 15 Press Esc.Zoning floor plan. Tag a zone 11 Activate the Level 1 . click in the Level 2 . 8 In the Level 1 . Creating Zones on Multiple Levels | 63 . 10 Click Finish Editing Zone.Zoning view to activate it. zoom out.Zoning view. and add the Lounge 215 space to the zone. Verify that the distance is 1/2". 7 Click Edit Zone tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Add Space. 14 Click in the Lounge space to tag the associated zone. and then select the tag so that you can use the drag control to move it as desired.

The tag only displays in the view where it was placed. 17 In the Change Parameter Values dialog. and zone information. space. 64 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . Because the heating and cooling loads calculations have not been performed. and Left corners converge to orient the model as shown. enter Lounge . click the corner where the Top. You can expand the zone in the System Browser to view the spaces in it. on the ViewCube. Verify building information 1 In the Project Browser. you verify the building. click Training Files.Zoning view. and click OK. 18 Press F9 to display the System Browser. View a space 3 In the preview pane of the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. under Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Heating and Cooling Loads. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and view graphical representations of the spaces to verify space boundaries and volumes. The new zone name displays in the System Browser.East. In this exercise. the tag displays “Not Computed” for those values. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Rename the zone 16 In the Level 1 .Zoning to make it the active view. Front. double-click the zone tag. double-click Level 1 . Working with the Analytical Model In this exercise. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_01_i.rvt. 19 Close the file with or without saving it. for Name Value. you created a zone for spaces on different levels of the building.

Right-click in the preview pane to access pan and zoom commands. you can verify that the space boundaries are as you defined them. ■ TIP You can use the ViewCube to spin/reorient the view. verify that Wireframe is selected. The Details tab contains a hierarchical list of spaces and the zones that have been assigned to them. 5 On the Details tab: ■ Expand 1_South_Lounge. With 109 Lounge selected. NOTE Wireframe displays the volume of a space measured by the interior boundaries.4 On the View Selector (located below the preview pane). Using the Highlight tool. ■ Working with the Analytical Model | 65 . you isolate the space. and select 109 Lounge. You can also view a space in relation to the other spaces or architecture in the entire building. Click (Highlight). The space for 109 Lounge highlights in red. The space displays while all other spaces are hidden. ■ Click to deactivate the Highlight tool. Next. click (Isolate). The Isolate tool allows you to verify one or more spaces even if they are usually obstructed by other spaces or by the building architecture.

click . verify that <Default> is selected for Occupancy and Heat Gain (per person). Below the list of spaces and zones. verify that <Building> is selected. scroll down in the left pane. you verify information that will be used during a heating and cooling loads analysis of the space. 8 Verify the space information: ■ For Space Type. and then click OK.■ On the Details tab. For Construction Type. and in the Electrical Loads dialog. click . These specify the space usage and construction materials for the space. click . you verify information that will be used during a heating and cooling loads analysis of the zone. This specifies the lighting and power loads for the space. the space information displays for the selected space. Next. This specifies the number of people or the area per person for the space. Revit MEP provides default settings for space types. and in the Space Type Settings dialog. and in the People dialog. select 1_South_Lounge. verify that <Default> is selected for Lighting Values and for Power Values. All spaces in the zone display in isolation. ■ ■ ■ Next. 66 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . For People. and click OK. For Electrical Loads. select 109 Lounge. and then click OK. select Lounge/Recreation. Verify space information 7 On the Details tab. You can use the Space Type Settings dialog to adjust settings as necessary. 6 Click to deactivate the Isolate tool.

heating air temperature. floors. ■ ■ For Outdoor Air Information. cooling air temperature.00 °F : 54. Next. 13 Deactivate the Isolate tool. This indicates the outdoor air per person.Verify zone information 9 Select 1_South_Lounge. you allow the values to be calculated by the loads engine. For Heating Information. and zoom to the corner of the building as shown. verify that 74.00 °F : 90. and humidification set point. you use the Shading view to examine the inner volume of the model for voids. View the shaded model 11 On the View Selector. This indicates the heating set point. and air changes per hour. For Cooling Information. 12 Using the methods learned previously. click (Shading). NOTE By not specifying values for the humidification set point and dehumidification set point. 10 Verify the zone information: ■ ■ For Service Type. verify that N/A : N/A : N/A is specified. Working with the Analytical Model | 67 . outdoor air per area.00 °F : N/A is specified. roofs. This indicates the cooling set point. Below the list of spaces and zones. The inner volume is bounded by interior surfaces of walls. highlight and isolate the space for 109 Lounge to view its inner volume. verify that <Building> is selected.00 °F : N/A is specified. verify that 70. and other room-bounding components. This is usually preferable to indicating a particular percentage for those parameters. the zone information displays for the selected zone. NOTE Shading displays the inner volume of a space. and dehumidification set point.

Because this is an unoccupied space.Notice that there is a void in a second-floor plenum space. For Name. Modify space properties 19 Select the space. open MEP . 17 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Upper Limit. 15 In the Project Browser. select the zone that includes all plenum spaces for Level 2 (named 2_Plenum). 20 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. ■ ■ Add the plenum space to a zone 21 In the drawing area. enter 212P. select Level 3. enter 0. and then click Place Space tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. Notice that Condition Type updates to Unconditioned. Under Energy Analysis. 18 Click in the empty plenum area to place the space. and click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. notice that Condition Type is Heated and Cooled. select Plenum. 16 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space.Plenum ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 Plenum. select Plenum. Under Energy Analysis. click Cancel. 68 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . For Offset. Click OK. Add a space to fill a void 14 In the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. for Number. it doesn’t need to be included in the heating and cooling loads analysis.

enter 03101. and then click In the Manage Place and Locations dialog: ■ ■ .Space Plan. 4 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Building Type. 2 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Information. and verify that the space has replaced the void. double-click Level 2 . and zone information. Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads | 69 . and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_02_i. for City. click in the Value field. verify that Manchester. for Energy Data. click Edit. is selected. 3 In the Instance Properties dialog. you specify project settings that affect heating and cooling. On the Place tab. Select Automatically adjust the clock for daylight savings changes. and select space Plenum 212P. and viewed the spaces in the preview pane to verify space boundaries and volumes. and you perform a heating and cooling loads analysis. under Energy Analysis. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Specify project settings 1 In the Project Browser. 24 Click Finish Editing Zone. NH. Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads In this exercise. you verified building. For Location. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans.22 Click Modify HVAC Zones tab ➤ Zone panel ➤ Edit Zone.rvt. space. In this exercise. select School or University. click Training Files. 26 Close the file with or without saving it. 25 Open the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. The report that is the result of this analysis allows you to determine the heating and cooling demands of the building. For Postal Code. 23 Click Edit Zone tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Add Space. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.

■ On the Weather tab.Audio Visual. a cooling load. both. verify that 1' 0" is specified. verify that Occupiable is selected. 7 Zoom in to the center area of the building. Click OK twice. select space Library 219. 8 In the drawing area. NOTE The Areas and Volumes option must be selected in order to perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. for Values. For Latent. enter 200 Btu/h. In the People dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Occupancy. verify that Use closest weather station (Manchester Airport) is selected. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. For Sliver Space Tolerance. first highlight it using the cursor so that the space crossing lines display. or neither. after opening the Heating and Cooling Loads tool. and enter 50 sq. under Volume Computations.When the location is in an area that observes Daylight Savings Time. For Export Complexity. and click OK. for Building Service. verify that Water Loop Heat Pump is specified. ■ In the Type Properties dialog. and then click . ft. and click OK. For Space Type. verify that Simple with Shading Surfaces is selected. verify that New Construction is selected. For Condition Type. select Heated and cooled. For People. click in the Value column. click Edit. For Building Construction. right-click. This is the parameter that determines whether a space is included in a heating load. 70 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . you need to select this option. select Specified. If. In order to select a space. and click OK. 6 On the Computations tab of the Area and Volume Computations dialog. Select Area per person. verify that <Building> is specified. 9 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Energy Analysis. select Specified. enter 150 Btu/h. ■ ■ ■ ■ In the Space Type Settings dialog. For Sensible. For Project Phase. and click Element Properties. you receive a message that the Areas and Volumes option is not checked and that the space volumes will be approximate. For Ground Plane. this option adjusts the times automatically. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify area and volume setting 5 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel drop-down ➤ Area and Volume Computations. Under Heat Gain (per Person). for Values. select Library . verify that Level 1 is selected. verify that Areas and Volumes is selected (default setting).

See Help for more information about the integrated heating and cooling loads analysis tool and its calculation methods. If a (Warning) displays for any space in the building. and can be modified here. (Zone Heating ■ In the Heating Information dialog. (opens the IMPORTANT The Heating and Cooling Loads dialog contains building information that only affects the heating and cooling loads analysis. click Calculate. click Information). and then re-open the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog to begin calculations. For Electrical Loads. verify the settings specified earlier: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Building Type. is specified. verify that School or University is selected. for Values. 12 Click the Details tab. There should be no warnings displayed. ■ Select 2_Middle_Library. Click OK twice. For Building Service. For Building Construction. Next. 10 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Heating and Cooling Loads. You should correct the space error in the building model. select Actual. you view the space and zone volumes in the building model. Perform a heating and cooling loads analysis 14 In the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. and click OK. 13 Under 2_Middle_Library. Revit MEP stores this information as project information. and under Heating Information. You have verified the building information. Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads | 71 . 11 On the General tab of the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. Various factors (such as analytical and inner volumes of the spaces) are analyzed as Revit MEP performs the heating and cooling loads analysis. The information for the space that you entered in the Element Properties dialog displays. verify that <Building> is specified. In the Electrical Loads dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Lighting. Under Power. If you have made changes to settings in the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. For Location. select Actual. select 219 Library. click Edit. for Values. and click to learn the cause for the warning.■ ■ ■ Click OK. it should be corrected before you calculate loads. You can view the building materials for this construction type by clicking Building Construction dialog). verify that Water Loop Heat Pump is selected. verify that Heating Set Point is 70°F . verify that Manchester. click OK to save your changes and close the dialog. NH. Select the space associated with the warning.

18 Close the report and activate Level 2 . 2 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel ➤ Legend. Notice that the space information was automatically updated. 22 Close the file with or without saving it.Space Plan. 15 Review the loads report for project. click Training Files. 3 In the drawing area. Creating a Zone Color Scheme In this exercise. 21 Click OK. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog closes. space.Zoning Load Fill is highlighted. you assign a color scheme to a zone in the building. 72 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . and a loads report displays. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_03_i. NOTE You must perform a new heating and cooling loads analysis each time you modify building. or zone information. under Energy Analysis. and zone information for the building model. indicating that it’s the active view. you performed a heating and cooling loads analysis on your building and viewed the loads report.rvt. review the Calculated Loads and Design Loads. You are taken to the place in the report where the space information is displayed for review. and then click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Click OK. 20 In the Instance Properties dialog. Assign a color scheme to a zone 1 In the Project Browser. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . you can rezone the model as necessary to optimize equipment usage in the building. under the zone summary for 2_Middle_Library. 19 In the drawing area. space. In this exercise. click to the right of the building to place the legend. or make any changes to the model. For Color Scheme. 17 In the loads report. In the left pane of the Open dialog.After the heating and cooling loads analysis is completed. weather. select 219 Library. 16 After you review the loads report. TIP You can find all generated Loads Reports in the Project Browser under Reports. A color scheme allows you to communicate and identify parameters visually and spatially rather than by using space schedules or accessing element properties. select HVAC Zones. click the blue hyperlink for 219 Library. 4 In the Choose Space Type and Color Scheme dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Space Type. verify that Cooling Load by Zone is selected. otherwise the loads report or schedules will not reflect your changes.

under Schemes. 7 Click Modify Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme.5 Zoom in to the legend. 8 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. and click OK. The new scheme displays in the view. Select a different color scheme legend 6 In the drawing area. Creating a Zone Color Scheme | 73 . in 1-ton increments. You want a scheme that allows for a greater tonnage range. select Tonnage Range. Notice that the cooling load is based on tonnage value. select the color scheme legend.

The new scheme allows for a greater range of cooling load values. open Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 26. 11 Using the method learned previously. 74 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . 9 Type ZF to zoom the view to fit the drawing area. The colors are updated in the plan view to match the new scheme type. Apply a color scheme to a section view 10 In the Project Browser. add a Cooling Load by Zone color scheme to the HVAC zones of the section view.

click Training Files. In the next exercise.12 Close the file with or without saving it. Select Schedule building components. Instead of placing this schedule on sheets as a construction document. For Name. enter Space Airflow Schedule. Define the schedule 1 In the Project Browser. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_04_i. select Spaces. ■ ■ ■ ■ Specify schedule properties 4 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ At the bottom left of the dialog. 3 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ Under Category. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. verify that Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . select Spaces. For Phase. In this exercise. you create a schedule that you use as a design tool for the supply air system. more category options are available. you use it as a design tool to determine whether the correct amount of airflow is being supplied to each of the rooms in the model. for Select available fields from. Creating an Airflow Schedule | 75 . you applied a color scheme to the zones in your building. You then use the schedule to adjust the air terminal airflow properties to more closely meet design requirements. Creating an Airflow Schedule In this exercise. If you select Show categories from all disciplines. select New Construction.Space Fill is the active view.rvt. Click OK. you create a schedule for the supply air system project. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Report and Schedules panel ➤ Schedule/Quantities.

(minus sign) after Calculated Supply Airflow. ■ On the Formatting tab: ■ ■ For Fields. and then select Hidden field. select Not Between.■ Under Available fields. In the Schedule Properties dialog. select Calculated Supply Airflow. add Actual Supply Airflow to the formula. and Blank line. For Formula. For Type. the calculated value named Airflow Delta displays under Scheduled fields and will display as a column in the schedule. Click OK. For Discipline. Specify additional schedule properties ■ On the Sorting/Grouping tab: ■ ■ ■ For Sort by. double-click: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Level Number Name Calculated Supply Airflow Actual Supply Airflow The selected fields are added to the Scheduled fields section. for Formula. In the Fields dialog. select Number. click (Browse). select Level. You format the Airflow Delta field to display as red when the difference between calculated and actual airflow is outside an acceptable range. ■ Click Calculated Value. select Level. Define the airflow delta formula 5 In the Calculated Value dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. select Airflow Delta. Select Ascending. and click OK. and then click Conditional Format. 76 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . For Then by. Select Formula. ■ ■ Using the method learned previously. enter Airflow Delta. enter . and then click . In the Calculated Value dialog. Define conditional formatting for the airflow delta ■ In the Conditional Formatting dialog: ■ For Test. select Air Flow. Header. For Fields. select HVAC.

verify that Show is highlighted. In this exercise. For Background Color.■ ■ ■ For Value. Under Conditions to Use. 6 On the Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Filter Unplaced or Unenclosed Items panel. In later exercises. all the Actual Supply Airflow values are 0. and you can manipulate the display of columns as with any spreadsheet. In the Color dialog. a view opens that contains the selected space. enter -25 CFM and 25 CFM. and click OK. you use the airflow schedule when adding system components to satisfy the required airflow. ■ The schedule displays. or right-click a column to hide or unhide it. right-click to access schedule properties. Because no air terminals have been placed in the model. you created an airflow schedule and defined properties such that when the airflow delta is in an unacceptable range. click the color swatch. Click OK twice. the schedule gives a visual indication of the discrepancy. you begin the designing phase by placing air terminals in the spaces. In the next lesson. This concludes the planning stage of the systems project. 7 Close the file with or without saving it. Creating an Airflow Schedule | 77 . select red. notice that the software will test for delta values that are outside the range of -25 to 25 CFM. When you select a field and click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ Highlight in Model. Double-click the column boundary to expand the column to the width of the text. and all Airflow Delta fields are red for occupiable spaces.

78 .

Placing Hosted Air Terminals In this exercise. After completing the air systems lesson. you will have been introduced to concepts and practices that you will use to design the piping systems. In this lesson. learn a method to precisely place air terminals into the ceiling plan. you size ductwork and validate your air system design. you will create supply air systems. You begin your supply air systems design by placing air terminals in rooms and adding a water source heat pump (WSHP). Then. you use automatic layout tools and manual placement to create the primary and secondary supply air systems and ductwork to connect the components that you added.Designing Mechanical Air Systems 5 Designing air systems in Revit MEP is a straightforward and intuitive process. After system creation. As you place the air terminals. and work with the airflow schedule. you place air terminals in the ceiling of the rooms. 79 . you modify air terminal parameters. IMPORTANT It is highly recommended that you complete Designing Mechanical Air Systems before starting Designing Piping Systems.

and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. and scroll to space 223. 2 Double-click Schedules/Quantities ➤ Space Airflow Schedule. 3 In the ceiling view. 80 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems .Design ➤ Ceiling Plans ➤ Level 2 .HVAC Ceiling is highlighted.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. When you highlight a space using the cursor. 5 Select space 223 in the schedule. 4 Click in the schedule view to make it active.rvt. the space crossing lines display. indicating that it’s the active view. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_01_i. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and notice that the space is selected in the plan view as well. zoom in to space Lounge 223 in the upper left corner. Prepare the design views 1 In the Project Browser. and then click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. click Training Files. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .

Modify the supply diffuser flow 12 In the ceiling plan. 19 Place 2 additional diffusers as shown. The schedule updates with the new flow data. and select Supply Diffuser . verify that Constrain is cleared. and press Enter. 9 On the Placement panel. 17 Move the cursor down.HVAC Ceiling to make it the active view. If the host element is modified or moved. 10 Click to place the supply diffuser in the upper left corner of the space. the Airflow Delta is calculated accordingly. and press Enter. and then select both Copy and Multiple. enter 425 CFM. click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. which in this case is the ceiling grid. for Flow. 16 Select the upper left corner of the diffuser as the copy start point. select the diffuser. Copy the supply diffuser 14 With the diffuser still selected. type 12. 8 Click Place Air Terminal tab ➤ Element panel. NOTE Hosted air terminals are placed at the height of the host. Multiple allows you to place multiple copies of the diffuser without reactivating the Copy tool after each placement.Rectangular Face Round Neck . 13 On the Options Bar. as shown. and then press Esc to end the command. Notice that the lounge’s Actual Supply Airflow field in the schedule updates after the terminal is placed. Also. 7 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Air Terminal. the hosted elements are updated as well. 11 Click Place Air Terminal tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. click Place on Face.Add a supply air terminal 6 Click in Level 2 . 15 On the Options Bar. Placing Hosted Air Terminals | 81 .Hosted from the Type Selector drop-down.Hosted : 24"x24" Face 8" Neck . 18 Repeat to add a third diffuser.

Hosted : Workplane-based Return Diffuser from the Type Selector drop-down. 25 In the drawing area. as shown.Tag diffusers 20 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. select one of the diffusers. Next. navigate to Training\Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\Diffuser Tag. click Yes. If alerted that there is no tag loaded for the diffuser object. and the airflow delta value is within acceptable range.rfa. clear Leader. and click Open. 24 In the Open dialog. 82 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . 27 Select Return Diffuser . click Place on Face. Each diffuser has an airflow capacity of 425 CFM. 29 Place 2 diffusers. 21 On the Options Bar. 28 On the Placement tab. select each of the 5 supply diffusers. and then press Esc. notice that the insertion point snaps the center of each diffuser to a grid intersection instead of centering the diffuser between grid lines. As you place the return diffusers. you edit the return diffuser family in order to align the diffuser edges to the ceiling grid lines. you load one from the library as follows: 23 In the alert dialog. Place return diffusers 26 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Air Terminal. 22 In the drawing area.

select Strong Reference. as shown. and click to select the lines. 34 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Instance Properties. press Tab to highlight the chain of lines. 35 In the Instance Properties dialog. Placing Hosted Air Terminals | 83 . under Other. 36 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Family Editor panel ➤ Load into Project. 32 In the Project Browser. and click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Family panel ➤ Edit Family.Edit the diffuser family 30 In the drawing area. You change the symbolic lines to strong references so that they can be used to align to the lines of the ceiling grid. 31 In the alert dialog. 33 Highlight one of the symbolic lines. Level. and click OK. for Reference. open Views (all) ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Ref. select one of the return diffusers. click Yes.

37 In the Family Already Exists dialog, click Overwrite the existing version and its parameter values. Align the diffusers in the ceiling grid 38 In the ceiling plan, zoom in to the return diffuser at the bottom left of the Lounge. 39 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Align. 40 In the drawing area, select the vertical grid line as shown.

41 Select the right edge of the diffuser. 42 Select the horizontal grid line as shown, and then select the top edge of the diffuser.

43 Using the same method, align the other return diffuser, as shown, and then press Esc twice.

44 While pressing Ctrl, select both return diffusers, and on the Options Bar, for Flow, enter 650 CFM310 CFM, and press Enter. Modify the airflow display arrows 45 Select the return diffuser at the lower left, right-click, and click Element Properties. 46 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Mechanical, clear LeftArrow, and click OK.

84 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems

47 Using the same method, clear RightArrow and DownArrow for the other return diffuser.

48 Close the file with or without saving it.

Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals
In this exercise, you place air terminals in a room that does not have a dropped ceiling. As you place the air terminals, you modify air terminal parameters and work with the airflow schedule.

Training File
■ ■

Click

➤ Open ➤ Project.

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_02_i.rvt.

Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 85

Add non-hosted air terminals 1 In the Project Browser, expand HVAC - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1 - HVAC Plan - Design to make it the active view. 2 On the View Control Bar, for Scale, click 1/8" = 1'-0". 3 Zoom in to space Instruction 115, at the lower left corner of the building. When you highlight a space using the cursor, the space crossing lines display, and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. 4 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Close Hidden. 5 Open Schedules/Quantities ➤ Space Airflow Schedule, and then click View tab ➤ Windows ➤ Tile. 6 Click in the floor plan to make it the active view. 7 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Air Terminal. 8 In the Type Selector, select Supply Diffuser - Rectangular Face Round Neck : 24x24 - 8 Neck. 9 On the Options Bar, verify that Tag on Placement is selected. 10 In the drawing area, click to place the air terminal in the space as shown, and then click Place Air Terminal tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify.

The schedule was automatically updated with the actual supply airflow capacity of the diffuser. Also, the diffuser was tagged as it was placed. NOTE The software assigns sequential numbers to components in the order in which they are placed in a drawing. If you delete a component and subsequently place more of the same component in the same drawing, the number assigned to the deleted component will not be used. As a result, your components may be numbered differently than those in the training files. 11 Select the diffuser, and then click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 12 Modify the diffuser properties:

In the Instance Properties dialog, under Constraints, for Offset, enter 8'. Because non-hosted components are associated with a level, the offset value is the height of the diffuser from the level. Under Mechanical - Airflow, for Flow, enter 360 CFM. Click OK.

■ ■

86 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems

13 With the diffuser still selected, click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 14 Select the bottom left corner of the diffuser, move the cursor down, type 20', and then press Enter. 15 Press Esc. By copying the diffuser, you are also specifying the same offset and flow for the new diffuser. Notice that the copied air terminal does not have a tag.

16 Using the same method, select both air terminals and copy them 14' to the right.

Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 87

Tag existing diffusers 17 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 18 On the Options Bar, clear Leader. 19 Select each of the untagged diffusers, and then press Esc. Create an embedded schedule You enhance the schedule by creating an embedded schedule to show data (system type, type, mark, and flow) for individual diffusers in each space. 20 Double-click the title bar of the Space Airflow Schedule to maximize it, and then right-click in the schedule, and click View Properties. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Other, for Embedded Schedule, click Edit. 22 In the Schedule Properties dialog:
■ ■

Select Embedded Schedule. For Category, select Air Terminals, and then click Embedded Schedule Properties.

23 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, under Available Fields, double-click System Type, Type, Mark, and Flow. 24 On the Sorting/Grouping tab, for Sort by, select Mark. 25 Click OK 3 times. The schedule is updated and lists the data for individual air terminals in each space. Although the Airflow Delta value is within an acceptable range, it is a negative value. Next, you modify the airflow capacity of the diffuser in the lower left corner of the space to offset the increased heat gain of the southwesterly exposure.

88 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems

Modify an airflow value in the schedule You use the schedule as a design tool to modify the airflow. 26 Using the method learned previously, tile the windows. 27 In the schedule, under space 115, select SD 1-12-110. 28 In the embedded portion of the Space Airflow Schedule, for Flow, enter 450 CFM, and press Enter. 29 Using the same method, change the flow for SD 1-12-111 and 112 to 330 CFM. Each change is dynamic and immediately propagates throughout your project, because you are modifying the digital database of building information. This digital database information source is the integral concept of Building Information Modeling (BIM).

The Airflow Delta value for the space updates to a positive number.

Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 89

Place air handling equipment 30 Close the Space Airflow Schedule, and maximize Level 1 - HVAC Plan - Design. 31 In the drawing area, select the zone (2-West-Area T) that includes space 115. As you highlight the zone, pay attention to the tooltip and the status bar to be sure you’re selecting the zone and not the space. The zone indicator has a line that spans all spaces in the zone, as shown.

32 Open the Instance Properties dialog, and under Energy Analysis, verify that the Calculated Heating Load value is 33807 Btu/h and the Calculated Cooling Load value is 3.9 ton (approximately 1.5 times the heating load). 33 Click OK. 34 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. 35 In the Type Selector, select WSHP - Horizontal - High Efficiency - 2-5 Tons - Left Return - Right Discharge : 4 Tons. 36 In the drawing area, zoom and pan to the double door for space 115. 37 Press Spacebar twice to change the rotation of the pump so that the supply faces the space and the return faces away from the space. 38 Click to select an insertion point so that the supply is at the approximate center of the doorway. 39 Press Esc twice to end the command.

90 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems

and click OK. 41 In the Instance Properties dialog. enter 9' 0"2750. For the start point. Verify that the measured distance is 9'.40 Access the instance properties for the heat pump. for Constraints ➤ Offset. 44 Zoom in to space 115. and verify the height of the WSHP: ■ ■ Click Modify tab ➤ Inquiry panel ➤ Measure drop-down ➤ Measure Between Two References. 42 Press Esc to clear the selection. Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 91 . click the Level 1 line. Verify equipment mounting heights 43 Open Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 26. click to select the midpoint of the bottom of the WSHP. ■ ■ For the end point.

you then create ductwork to physically connect the system components. 5 Verify that there are no Mechanical systems listed. IMPORTANT Unlike logical connections. However. 45 Close the file with or without saving it. right-click the title. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. verify that Design ➤ HVAC . This workflow is the Revit MEP recommended best practice for systems creation.HVAC Plan . indicating that it’s the active view. you create low pressure secondary supply air systems. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. You then create the logical connection between the system components. 4 If the System Browser title is Zones.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses. physical connections (ductwork) are not required for systems designing. After creating the logical connection.rvt. click Training Files. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems In this exercise. In this exercise. 2 Zoom in to space Lounge 223 at the upper left of the building. A Revit MEP system is the logical connection between system components such as air terminals and mechanical equipment. When you highlight a space. You create air systems by placing air terminals and mechanical equipment.Design is highlighted. In the left pane of the Open dialog. including energy analysis. 92 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. they are necessary to perform calculations (such as sizing) that reference the physical geometry. the space crossing lines display.Press Esc. Explore the System Browser 1 In the Project Browser. and click View ➤ Systems. you also use the System Browser to validate systems. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_03_i.

Only mechanical equipment components can be highlighted and selected when you are using the Add To System tool.IMPORTANT In the System Browser. and Flow value. 9 Click Modify Duct Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. Note that the Flow value (1700 CFM) is equal to the sum of the flow values for the 4 diffusers you added to the system. 16 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Add To System. the number of elements is updated. select the 3 supply diffusers shown in red and circled. All of the diffusers (air terminals) that you added are located under default systems categories in the Unassigned folder. select the supply diffuser at the upper left of space 223. and Create Systems) available on the Modify Air Terminals tab. Create a secondary air system 7 In the drawing area. Revit MEP assigned them to the Default Supply Air system. expand Mechanical ➤ Supply Air ➤ Mechanical Supply Air 1. 8 Click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Supply. 14 In the Instance Properties dialog. 13 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ System Properties. Connect Into. and then select the last supply diffuser in space 223. On the Options Bar. Notice that a mechanical system now displays in the System Browser. Because each system component must be assigned to a system after it is placed. As you add diffusers to systems. all system components are organized in a folder tree hierarchy. 6 Keep the System Browser open. 10 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Add To System. 11 In the drawing area. 12 In the System Browser. Notice that there are layout and system tools (Generate Layout. review the Number of Elements. and drag it to the bottom of the screen so that it displays horizontally below the floor plan. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 93 . System Name. 15 Click Cancel. These tools vary depending on the equipment used to create a system. the assigned diffusers move to the respective system folder.

23 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ System Properties. you also use the System Browser to validate systems. 18 Click OK. for Mark. you create ductwork to physically connect system components. 19 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Select Equipment. In this exercise. 94 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . You used the Create Supply Systems tool to logically connect air terminals to the WSHP. under Identity Data. This workflow is the Revit MEP recommended best practice for systems creation. 27 Close the file with or without saving it. Rename the system Next. In this exercise. which updates the name in the System Browser. highlight the value and click Ctrl+V to paste over the selection. you created low pressure secondary supply air systems for the building. you rename the system to match the identifying data (Mark) of the equipment properties. 26 Click Finish Editing System. and the system connects them.17 Using the method learned previously. highlight the value (WSHP 2-45) and click Ctrl+C to copy it. under Mechanical. and then select the WSHP (located outside the space). NOTE The organization of the Mechanical folder in the System Browser has changed so that the WSHP is the parent. The system name is updated from Mechanical Supply Air 1 to WSHP 2-45 in the System Browser. for System Name. 22 Click OK. 20 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Equipment Properties. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems In this exercise. 25 Click OK. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. access system properties to see that the flow value (2125 CFM) has updated to include the flow value of the final supply diffuser. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. the air terminals are the children.

which provides various layout tools. click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser to display it. 4 In the drawing area. Add ductwork using the Generate Layout tool 1 In the Project Browser. When you highlight a space using the cursor. select Network. Lines indicate the proposed duct layout (blue signifies a main duct line and green signifies a branch).Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . indicating that it’s the active view. and display solution 1. select the upper left diffuser. 3 If the System Browser isn’t displayed.rvt.Design is highlighted. 6 Use the Next Solution and Previous Solution arrows to scroll through the available solutions. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_04_i. the Network type provides several solutions. and then click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. the software recognizes the system components and sketches a temporary layout path connecting them. for Solution Type. click Training Files. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 95 .HVAC Plan. In the left pane of the Open dialog. In this case. 5 On the Options Bar. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. 2 Zoom in to space Lounge 223 in the upper left corner. each with branches off the main duct at 90-degree angles. Also. A Generate Layout tab displays. the space crossing lines display.

For Offset. 10 Select a vertical segment of the main duct. as shown. If there is not enough room for the software to create the necessary fittings. and use the drag control to drag it just to the left of the lighting fixtures. select Rectangular Duct: Mitered Elbows / Tees.Round. enter 3'. Select Branch.7 On the Options Bar. For Duct Type. enter 9' 10 1/2". you’ll get an error in a later step. enter 9' 10 1/2". Click OK. click Settings. select Flex Duct Round : Flex . 9 On the Generate Layout panel. For Flex Duct Type. For Maximum Flex Duct Length. click Modify. select Rectangular Duct: Mitered Elbows / Tees. 96 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . For Duct Type. For Offset. 8 In the Duct Conversion Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Main. WARNING Be careful not to drag the main duct too close to the diffusers.

11 Click Finish Layout. Remember to always check duct connectivity after modification. For example. a transition connecting the elbow is automatically added. as is the elbow itself. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 97 . Either relocate the system components. NOTE Errors may occur while attempting to create duct geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing. select a different layout solution. The sketch lines are converted to ductwork. or offset elevations are incorrect. or manually modify the duct. All fittings required to connect the duct system to system components are automatically added. The most common cause of these errors is that the duct usually has insufficient space to be created.

Press Tab a third time to highlight the entire network of connected ducts. Using a flow-based color scheme. fittings. but not all values are used in this view. and click to select it. 15 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog. This disconnection will be located at the point where the highlighting stops. 17 In the Type Properties dialog. Add a color scheme legend 12 In the drawing area. 98 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . press Tab twice to highlight the entire system. you check connectivity by moving the cursor over a segment of ductwork so that it highlights and then pressing Tab. You can delete ductwork and the system remains. for Color Scheme. The first time you press Tab. select By View. and equipment. and click OK. select Duct Color Fill . Modify the legend display 16 Select the color scheme legend. you can repair the connection by dragging the duct segment end point away from its current connection point and then dragging it back again to reconnect. the branch to which the duct is connected highlights. The ductwork is a physical (not a logical) connection. 14 Click to the right of the system to place the legend. If the entire network does not highlight.NOTE Notice that the ductwork is not listed in the System Browser. a disconnection exists. NOTE When multiple ducts and fittings are connected.Flow. Usually. and click Modify Duct Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. Press Tab a second time to highlight the entire network of connected ducts up to the first piece of connected equipment. you can verify connectivity as you create a system. Typically the disconnect results from not having enough room between the components that make the connection. under Graphics. and then click OK. 13 Click Analyze tab ➤ Color Schemes panel ➤ Duct Legend. for Values Displayed. thus it is not part of the system. highlight a segment of the main duct. Notice that the legend includes all possible values for the color scheme.

Airflow. under Mechanical . Modify flow values 18 In the drawing area. 19 In the Instance Properties dialog. select one of the diffusers in the system.The legend now shows only the color scheme values used in this view. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 99 . 20 In the drawing area. 25 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. 24 Click Modify Duct Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. for Schemes. select the color scheme legend. Edit color scheme 23 In the drawing area. 26 Click OK. Notice that the color fill for the connected ductwork has updated. note the Air Flow value (2125 CFM). and click OK. The outflow for the WSHP is calculated as the sum of the airflows for all downstream air terminals.Velocity. decrease the flow value by 100 CFM. select the WSHP. for Flow. Use the velocity-based color scheme as a visual reference to confirm that air is flowing through the system ductwork at the appropriate velocity. and press Enter. 22 Close the Instance Properties dialog. 21 Access the instance properties for the WSHP. and notice that the flow value has updated with the change. and then press Esc to clear the selection. and on the Options Bar. and click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. select Duct Color Fill .

08 in-wg/100ft. Select Restrict Height. you need to modify the layout: ■ ■ ■ In the warning dialog. If you get an error that there is not enough room to place the required fittings. press Tab 3 times to highlight the entire system (including the WSHP). Repeat the steps necessary to select the entire system and then size it. select Friction. Select the upper segment of main duct. highlight a segment of the duct. select Calculated Size Only. for Branch Sizing. The flow information graphically represents the properties of duct systems so that you can easily identify problems with the system. and enter . The ductwork and fittings are updated. Select Only.Calculate duct sizes 27 In the drawing area. and drag it to the right. and then click to select it. 100 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . click Cancel. and select 16". Under Constraints. 28 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Duct/Pipe Sizing. Click OK. 29 In the Duct Sizing dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Sizing Method.

and a system must contain ductwork (physical connection). Using this tool. 33 Move the cursor over the system components. 32 Click System Inspector tab ➤ System Inspector panel ➤ Inspect. and pressure loss. The selected system components or duct must be logically and physically connected for you to use the System Inspector to inspect airflow and pressure inside ductwork. pressure. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 101 .Inspect the system The System Inspector is a tool that lets you place the cursor over each system to inspect it for airflow. Use the information that displays (flow. you can target problem areas directly in your design and resolve them. 30 Select one of the ducts in the supply air system. 31 Click Modify Ducts tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ System Inspector. static pressure. and pressure loss) to find deficiencies in the system. so that you can modify the system design accordingly. Ductwork and system components must be connected to a system (logical connection). Notice that the ribbon now displays a System Inspector tab.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. 35 Click Finish. Manually Creating Ductwork In this exercise. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 36 Close the file with or without saving it.rvt.NOTE As you inspect a system. 34 Zoom in to various parts of the system and verify that the flow arrows are correct. You also convert rigid duct into specified lengths of flex duct. Red information and arrows indicate the highest percentage of pressure loss due to friction. click Training Files. remember that all information is color-coded according to pressure. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_05_i. you modify existing ductwork and then use the Connect Into tool to connect components to the existing air system. also known as the critical path. 102 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems .

6 Click midway between the 2 top light fixtures to specify the end of the first segment of the main duct. 5 Press Spacebar to make the new duct match the WSHP duct size and location.Manually create main duct line 1 In the Project Browser.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . 3 Right-click the supply air connector (the connector facing the room’s double doors).Design is highlighted. and click to specify the end of the main duct. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . and select the WSHP. 2 Zoom in to space Instruction 115 in the lower left corner. 7 Move the cursor to just below the lowest set of diffusers. and select Rectangular Duct : Mitered Elbows / Beveled Taps from the Type Selector drop-down. 4 Click Place Duct tab ➤ Element panel. and click Draw Duct.HVAC Plan . indicating that it’s the active view. Manually Creating Ductwork | 103 .

and Left sides converge in order to orient the view as shown. 12 End the branch by clicking at the intersection of the branch duct and the main duct.8 Press Esc twice to end the command. Create branch duct lines 9 To begin branch duct. NOTE When drawing duct. select 9' 10 1/2". Click this corner Resulting view orientation 104 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . click the corner where the Top. 11 On the Options Bar. for Offset. The software accounts for the difference in height from the diffuser connector to the specified offset height. right-click the connector grip. use the connector grip to quickly and accurately locate a connector. 14 In the Project Browser. select the top right diffuser.3D MEP. 13 Click Place Duct tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ Level 1 . double-click MEP . 10 Select Rectangular Duct : Mitered Elbows/Taps from the Type Selector drop-down. 15 On the ViewCube. Connect the remaining diffusers using the Connect Into tool The Connect Into tool is used to add or connect components to an existing air system. Front. and click Draw Duct.

connect the remaining diffusers to the main duct. 17 Tile the windows so that you can view results in 3D as you add duct in 2D. The ductwork is automatically created. the color fill indicates the flow value. and is sized appropriately for the neck size of the diffuser. it is considered a closed loop. 18 Make the floor plan the active view. Because this branch has 2 end points (the diffuser and the connector into the main duct).16 Zoom in to space Instruction 115. 19 In the drawing area. 20 Click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. Also. Manually Creating Ductwork | 105 . select the top unconnected supply diffuser. 22 Using the same method. 21 Click the main supply duct to select it as the duct to connect into. in space 115.

zoom in to the open end of the main duct. 25 Press Esc. A portion of the rigid ductwork is converted to Flex Duct. Revit MEP displays a warning that the flex duct that was created exceeds the Maximum Flex Duct setting in the Mechanical Settings dialog. 106 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . You can ignore the warning. and select the top left diffuser. 24 Select the remaining diffusers. Branch ductwork in 3D Add an endcap 26 In the plan view.Branch ductwork in 2D Convert duct to flex duct 23 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Convert to Flex Duct.

32 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Split. 30 Press Esc twice. you need to add an endcap to create a closed loop. 28 Select Rectangular Endcap : Standard from the Type Selector drop-down. and click to select it.To ensure that the system has proper flow propagation and accurate system calculations. 29 Click the endpoint snap of the main duct. press Tab to highlight the entire main duct run. 27 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Duct Fitting. Endcap in 3D Split and size main duct 31 Maximize the plan view. and then click Modify. 33 Click on the main duct below the top set of diffusers as shown. Manually Creating Ductwork | 107 . Size ductwork 34 Highlight a section of the main duct (which is now split).

This height constraint is used when you place duct in a restricted space. The ductwork is sized to provide appropriate CFM value for the system. under Constraints.35 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Duct/Pipe Sizing. under Mechanical . 39 In the Instance Properties dialog. such as a plenum. 108 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . verify that the value is the total of the diffusers supplied by that segment of duct.Airflow. Verify duct sizing 38 In the drawing area. 36 In the Duct Sizing dialog. and then click OK. 41 Close the file with or without saving it. and click OK. 37 Press Esc to clear the selection. select a segment of the main duct. clear Restrict Height. verify the flow rate for the remaining segments of the main duct. for Flow. 40 Using the same method. and click Modify Ducts tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.

Use a color-coded display to verify and adjust pipe sizing. you learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Place mechanical equipment.Designing a Mechanical Piping System 6 In this lesson. Then. Inspect and validate the piping systems and physical connections. you create a hydronic piping system that is designed to run in a cooling mode and a heating mode. Add valves to allow the overall piping system to work in 2 modes: cooling and heating. you create the systems and piping to logically and physically connect the system components. This system is modeled to accommodate full system flow through a boiler. Automatically and manually lay out piping. using modulating valves to divert through the cooling tower during cooling mode. Use the System Browser to review the piping systems. and a cooling tower located on the roof. additional water source heat pumps from level 1. including 2 base mounted pumps. You begin the piping system design by placing water source heat pumps and a boiler on level 3 of the building model. Create return and supply piping systems. In this lesson. or to bypass the cooling tower during heating mode. 109 .

Level 3 mechanical piping system Adding Mechanical Equipment In this exercise. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_01_i. 110 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . click Training Files. on level 3 of the building model. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. including 2 water source heat pumps (WSHP) and a condensing boiler. you place mechanical equipment. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt.

7 On the Options Bar. 5 Press Spacebar to rotate the component.HVAC Plan .High Efficiency . 3 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 .Design is highlighted.Right Discharge : 6 Ton from the Type Selector drop-down.Horizontal . verify that Wall faces is selected.Adding air side equipment 1 In the Project Browser. 6 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimension panel ➤ Aligned. A tooltip and the status bar (located at the lower left of the window) confirm the space name and number. and click to place it in the shorter wing of the building. 4 Click Place Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel.Left Return . indicating that it’s the active view. 2 Zoom in to the right side of the shorter building wing. and select WSHP . you can identify a space by placing the cursor over the space component. as shown. Adding Mechanical Equipment | 111 .2-6 Tons . NOTE Although space tags are not included in this view. in corridor 328.

) 112 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .8 Click the corridor wall face. (Use the alignment sketch graphics to position the second WSHP the same distance from the corridor wall as the first. 9 Click Place Dimensions tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. and enter 2'. and click to place the dimension. 13 Place another WSHP to the left of the one you just placed. as shown. as shown. 12 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. click the top edge of the WSHP. 11 Press Enter and then press Esc. and in the Type Selector. verify that the WSHP is still selected. 10 Select the WSHP. click the dimension.

for Water Flow. and select Condensing Boiler : 500 MBH from the Type Selector drop-down. enter 9'. select the 2 WSHPs. Add water side equipment 18 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. Under Mechanical. 17 Press Esc to clear the selection. 16 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Constraints. for Offset.14 Click Modify. enter 12 GPM. as shown. Modify WSHP parameters 15 While pressing Ctrl. Adding Mechanical Equipment | 113 . Click OK. and click to place it in the mechanical room. 19 Click Place Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel. and click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. above and to the left of the Base Mounted Pump. 20 Press Spacebar 3 times to rotate the component.

The recommended workflow to create piping systems is to: ■ ■ ■ Place mechanical equipment and other system components. and use the System Browser to review and confirm the systems. A system is the logical connection between system components such as water source heat pumps (WSHPs) and a boiler. including flow and pressure.21 Click Modify. 22 Close the file with or without saving it. Create the logical connection between the system components. Create pipes to physically connect the system components. 114 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . Creating a Piping System In this exercise. you create the return and supply piping systems. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses.

and expand the Default Hydronic Supply 1 and the Default Hydronic Return 1 systems to view the mechanical equipment placed in the building. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_02_i. 4 Click the titlebar for the System Browser window. Creating a Piping System | 115 . This display option allows you to simplify the browser view by showing only the Piping discipline. click Training Files. where it is easier to review the information. right-click the Systems column heading. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . analyses cannot be performed. and click View ➤ Piping. but without a corresponding system. 6 Expand the Unassigned folder. Explore the System Browser 1 In the Project Browser.Mech 330). and drag the window down so it displays along the bottom of the screen. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 .Design is highlighted.rvt. indicating that it’s the active view.IMPORTANT All system components are logically connected either by a system that you create or by a default system.HVAC Plan . 2 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building (Space . physical connections (pipes) are not required for systems creation. Chilled water supply system: 2 WSHPs and a cooling tower Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. You can create pipes to connect system components. 5 In the System Browser. Unlike logical connections (systems).

11 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Select Equipment. This display indicates that the system is selected. select the 2 WSHPs. They remain in the Default systems category until you assign them to a system. the assigned equipment moves from the Unassigned folder to the respective assigned system folder. and the Edit System tool is not active. 116 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 8 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Hydronic Return. A red dashed line connects the 2 WSHPs in the drawing. Revit MEP immediately assigned them to the Default Hydronic Return and Default Hydronic Supply systems category located in the Unassigned folder. You assign a system component to a system either by: ■ ■ Creating a logical connection (system) between the system components. the System Equipment is Condensing Boiler: 500 MBH. Equipment that remains in a default system is included in heating and cooling loads calculations. It does not indicate a pipe layout path. As you assign equipment to systems. 9 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System.In the System Browser. for System Name. IMPORTANT All mechanical equipment in the project should be assigned to a system other than a default system. enter CHWR to represent Chilled Water Return. 12 In the drawing area. select the boiler. while pressing Ctrl. select one of the WSHPs that you added to the system to activate this tool and the other options on the Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel. After you placed the WSHPs and boiler. Notice that on the Options Bar. Create the hydronic return piping system 7 In the drawing area. TIP If you clicked outside of the drawing area. Keep the System Browser open and refer to it as you create systems. leaving a large number of components in a default system can hinder performance and prevent accurate calculations for the systems where they should have been assigned. Therefore. all system components are organized in a folder tree hierarchy according to the system that you assigned to them. Assigning a system component to an existing system. 10 On the Options Bar.

15 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Hydronic Supply. 18 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. Notice that the Hydronic Return option does not display because the selected component already has a hydronic return system assigned to it.Design. 19 In the Project Browser.13 Click Finish Editing System.Design ➤ Floor Plans. 17 On the Options Bar.HVAC Plan . and select the cooling tower.) 16 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. and select the second WSHP to add it to the supply system. Creating a Piping System | 117 . for System Name. (You can click the Piping Systems tab to access the Return System properties. 20 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. double-click Roof . You have created the hydronic return system. Create the hydronic supply piping system 14 Select one of the WSHPs that you placed previously. under Design ➤ HVAC . enter CHWS to represent Chilled Water Supply. 21 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building.

and bypasses the cooling tower. the water returns through the boiler into the cooling tower by way of the WSHPs. Confirm and validate the systems 27 In the System Browser. 24 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Select Equipment. 118 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 26 Click Finish Editing System. 29 Right-click CHWS. 25 Select the boiler. In cooling mode. expand the Hydronic Return system category. indicating the logical connection. select Connector 1 : Undefined : Round : 4'' : Cooling Water Supply In.22 In the Select Connector dialog. In heating mode. You select the boiler as equipment for supply to the WSHPs. right-click the Hydronic Supply system category. IMPORTANT The new system named CHWS is now listed in the System Browser under Hydronic Supply ➤ Condensing Boiler: 500 MBH. the cooling tower provides cooled water to the system. Notice that the Options Bar indicates 3 for the Number of Elements. The hydronic supply system highlights in red. 23 Close the roof plan view. The CHWS system contains the 2 WSHPs and the cooling tower. and click Select. 28 Using the same method. and click Expand All. the boiler supplies heated water to the system. and click OK. You can now view the systems hierarchy: CHWR and CHWS logically connect the boiler (parent) with the WSHPs (children). The boiler is the only equipment that has connectors with compatible system types (hydronic supply and hydronic return).

31 In the Column Settings dialog. you create the physical connections in the pipe system automatically using the Generate Layout tool. and click Properties. and click OK. under Mechanical. 30 Right-click the Systems column heading. 32 In the System Browser.In the System Browser. right-click the Flow value for one of the WSHPs in the CHWS system. You can select the columns that you want to display in the System Browser. expand Piping. The CHWS Flow value is updated in the System Browser. you can view several parameters. for Water Flow. including the flow rate and size of the component. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 119 . select Fluid Type and Fluid Temperature. 33 In the Instance Properties dialog. You also manually modify the layout path as required. 34 Close the file with or without saving it. and click OK. enter 18 GPM. and click Column Settings. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout In this exercise.

and click OK.HVAC plan view range are highlighted. In the left pane of the Open dialog. When you draw a box to select components. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 120 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 3 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building (Space . 9 In the Select a System dialog. drag the cursor to the lower right corner to draw a selection box around the floor plan. Select components with the Filter tool 1 In the Project Browser.HVAC Plan . A system preview displays in red. the boiler.Design is highlighted. 4 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. Revit MEP provides several solutions from which to choose. and click to select it. 2 Beginning outside the building at the upper left corner. click Check None. The layout path solutions display with the main in blue and the branch in green.Mech 330). and the selected system components are already connected to more than one system (because they have multiple system connectors). you can place the cursor over a system component. then the Select a System dialog displays. press Tab to highlight the system. and then click OK to create a layout for the currently selected system. 10 Click OK. and the 2 base mounted pumps are selected (and display in red). and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_03_i. The level 3 water source heat pumps (WSHPs).Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 .rvt. 5 In the Filter dialog.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. indicating that it’s the active view. click Training Files. You select a system in the dialog to view it in the drawing. IMPORTANT If you select system components to create a pipe layout. 8 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. select Mechanical Equipment. select CHWR. You use an alternate method of selecting the system in the next steps. TIP Instead of selecting all components and filtering. you are selecting all components within the view range of the active view. Create the Level 3 return pipe layout 7 Select a WSHP. 6 Press Esc to clear the selection. Notice that all components within the Level 3 .

structural beams. click Settings. enter 1' 6''. You can modify this value for the main and branch elevations. ■ ■ Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 121 . 12 In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. verify that Solutions is selected. In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. Click (Next Solution) until solution 4 of 5 is selected. you can change the pipe type and the vertical offset at which the piping will automatically be created. IMPORTANT The branch offset lets you automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. verify that the Offset value for the Main and for the Branch is 10' 0''. For Inset. duct. select Perimeter.11 On the Options Bar. 15 On the Options Bar: ■ For Solution Type. 13 Click Cancel. The perimeter solution creates a layout that runs parallel (along a perimeter) to the connectors of the selected system components. 14 On the Generate Layout tab. or architectural components. It does not reference the architecture. This functionality is useful for avoiding interference with pipes.

Branch in a pipe network including the branch objects. The piping is automatically created along with the appropriate connectors and fittings so that all of the piping segments are connected to equipment. View the Status Bar to verify the branch option currently displayed. to display the path with thinner lines. 18 Place the cursor over the piping. the flow for one WSHP is 18. and press Tab 3 times. 17 Optionally. click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Thin Lines. select the pipe connecting the WSHP on the right to the boiler. Branch in a pipe network up to a piece of equipment. 122 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . Verify the flow In a previous exercise. the Status Bar displays the components being highlighted: ■ ■ ■ Branch in a pipe network. With each Tab. 19 In the drawing area. and the flow for the other is 12.16 Click Finish Layout. you modified the flow value for the WSHPs.

The flow through this pipe should equal the flow of both WSHPs. under Mechanical. This value indicates the total of the flow for the 2 WSHPs (18 GPM + 12 GPM). verify that the value for Flow is 30 GPM. and click OK. 22 Select the boiler. 23 Under Mechanical. notice that the Water Flow is 30 GPM. 24 Press Esc. and access its instance properties. The flow from the 2 WSHPs travels into the boiler. Add the Level 1 WSHPs to the return system 25 Select the WSHP on the left. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 123 . and click OK. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. 20 Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.

26 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel. 28 In the Project Browser. you logically added Level 1 WSHPs to the CHWR System.Design ➤ Floor Plans.Design. click Edit System. double-click Level 1 . and verify that CHWR is selected from the System Selector drop-down. 29 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. Physically connect the multi-level WSHPs Previously. 27 On the System Tools panel. 32 Click Finish Editing System. 30 Draw a selection window to select the 6 WSHPs. Logically. On the Options Bar. and zoom to fit the drawing in the view. Next. 31 Close the Level 1 plan view. the Number of Elements is now 8. which propagates flow throughout the system. the Level 1 WSHPs are connected to the chilled water return system (CHWR).HVAC Plan . you physically close the CHWR loop. 33 Zoom in to the piping that comes from the floor below. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 124 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .

Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 125 . 35 Using the drag control. note that the value for Flow is 95 GPM. and then close the Instance Properties dialog. 38 Using the same method. review the properties for the boiler to verify that the Water Flow value is 125 GPM. and then click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. under Mechanical. 37 In the Instance Properties dialog. The fittings are automatically created to connect to the return piping coming from below. so the total flow of 125 GPM indicates that the flow has propagated correctly. and the flow coming from Level 1 is 95 GPM. extend the pipe to the left until it connects to the center line of the existing pipe at the horizontal and nearest snap. NOTE For the purposes of this tutorial. Verify the flow from the lower level 36 With the new pipe selected. access its instance properties.34 Select the bottom piece of horizontal pipe. the 6 WSHPs from Level 1 have already been added to the chilled water supply system (CHWS). as shown. and click Cancel. The Level 3 WSHPs generate a flow of 30 GPM. Manually modify piping in layout mode 39 In the drawing area. select a WSHP.

126 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . enter 9' 6'' for both the Main Offset and the Branch Offset. Click Settings. The inset is the distance from the pipe to the connection on the selected system component. and then click OK. 42 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ For Solution Type. enter 0''/12''. select CHWS. For Slope. In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. For Inset. enter 1' 6''. 41 Click OK. 45 Click the supply pipe from the cooling tower above.40 In the Select a System dialog. select Perimeter 1 of 5. 44 Click the boiler to remove it from the layout path solution. ■ ■ 43 Click Generate Layout tab ➤ Generate Layout panel ➤ Remove.

48 While pressing Ctrl. (Both sections are at the same elevation.) 49 Select the 4-way arrow control. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 127 . select the right vertical green sketch line in the path. as shown. you connect the boiler to parallel-connected base mounted pumps. 47 In the drawing area. 46 Click Modify. as shown. In a later exercise.The boiler and cooling tower are no longer included in the layout path. select the vertical sketch line just above the one you already selected. and drag it to the left (just to the right of the double door in the underlay).

and drag it to the right to align it with the sketch lines you just moved.50 Using the same method. you: ■ ■ ■ ■ Connect the boiler to the return piping. 51 Click Finish Layout. or manually modify the pipe. 128 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . Add piping to close the supply loop. you manually lay out piping to create a closed loop system. or offset elevations are incorrect. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout In this exercise. The most common cause of these errors is that there is insufficient space to create the pipe. 52 Close the file with or without saving it. NOTE Errors may occur while you are attempting to create pipe geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing. Connect the cooling tower into the supply system to maintain the closed loop. select the short vertical path line connecting the right WSHP (in the same location as the short segment of pipe). Connect the base mounted pumps in parallel to the system. Either relocate the system components. To create the piping system. Remember to always check pipe connectivity after modification. select a different layout solution. You tile a plan view and a 3D view to simultaneously create the pipe (physical) connections and validate the pipe geometry.

You may find it helpful to view the system in both plan and 3D during design and validation.rvt. and the return pipes are magenta.HVAC Plan . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. 4 Adjust the view in both windows (use the ViewCube and Zoom tools) to see the connections on the boiler. double-click 3D HVAC Building. As you work in the training file. indicating that it’s the active view. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 3 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 .NOTE Default color filters for the Hydronic Supply and Hydronic Return have already been specified for this project in the Visibility Graphic Overrides dialog. you will notice that the supply pipes are dark purple. click Training Files. 2 Under Design ➤ HVAC .Design ➤ 3D Views. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . as shown. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_04_i. Tile the views 1 In the Project Browser. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 129 . Sometimes (such as during vertical alignment) it’s easier to select components in 3D.Design is highlighted.

as shown. 7 In the plan view.Modify return piping to accommodate supply piping 5 In the 3D view. 6 Press Delete. 130 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . select the section of piping. draw a selection window around the elbow fitting and the small piece of pipe connecting into the boiler return connector.

Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 131 . ■ Click to move the piping. 10 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. 9 In the 3D view.8 Move the piping: ■ ■ Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move. and press Esc to clear the selection. select the boiler. ■ Move the cursor up 4''. Click to specify the reference point.

The top base mounted pump in the plan view is primary. Plan view of return piping connection to the boiler Connect the primary base mounted pump to the boiler Two base mounted pumps are included in the system. click Connector 2 : Hydronic Return : Round : 2'' : Cold Water In. and click OK. select the boiler. 12 In the 3D view. The tool also automatically creates the appropriate fittings. The connections are automatically created. and the boiler is connected to the return piping.You use this tool on components with connectors to automatically create piping between the component and the existing system. 11 In the Select Connector dialog. select the return pipe riser. An automatic flow valve will be used to direct the flow from the boiler to the 2 pumps. and the lower one is secondary. 13 In the plan view. flow will propagate through the connecting pipe and be assigned to the appropriate system based on the connector to which it is connected. Using the Connect Into tool ensures that if the connection is successful. and click Draw Pipe. 14 Right-click the grip that represents the supply connector (top). 132 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .

17 Draw the piping: ■ Move the cursor to the right.7''. ■ Move the cursor down. and you select 1 connector. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 133 . and click just before the midway point on the primary base mounted pump. for Offset. enter 2'. You can input dimensions as you draw pipe to ensure specific length segments.In a plan view. 15 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Element panel. Add another 2' section of pipe to the right. ■ ■ On the Options Bar. the Select Connector dialog displays prompting you to select the return or the supply connector. enter 1' . and press Enter. if a component has 2 connectors that are not connected to piping. and select Pipe Types: Standard from the Type Selector drop-down. 16 Press Spacebar to acquire offset and pipe diameter values from the connector.

select Connector 2 : Undefined: Round: 3''. select the primary base mounted pump. Notice in the 3D view that the specified offset dropped the horizontal run down. 19 In the plan view. 20 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. it may be helpful to switch Automatically Connect off to avoid unintended piping connections. 21 In the Select Connector dialog. and click OK. As you place piping runs that are close together. and the appropriate fittings are created. and select it. 18 Press Esc twice. Upgrade a fitting 23 Zoom in to the elbow fitting.NOTE The Automatically Connect option attempts to connect piping that is positioned within a specified range. as shown. 134 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . The pipe is automatically connected to the base mounted pump. 22 Select the last segment of pipe you drew.

24 Click the bottom plus symbol to upgrade the fitting from an elbow to a tee. 26 Move the cursor down until the Status Bar indicates that the alignment is at the intersection of the base mounted pump. right-click the bottom connector. and click to draw the pipe. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 135 . and click Draw Pipe. 27 Move the cursor to the right. click to connect to the pump. NOTE To downgrade from a tee fitting to an elbow. and when the connector point displays. zoom out in the 3D view to see the new connections. 28 Press Esc. 29 If necessary. and click the minus symbol. Connect the secondary base mounted pump 25 Select the tee fitting. you select the tee fitting.

31 On the Options Bar.Connect the base mounted pumps in parallel 30 In the plan view. for Offset. and click to create the pipe. 33 Press Esc. and click Draw Pipe. select the primary base mounted pump. 136 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . right-click the discharge connector. enter 4'. 32 Move the cursor down until it joins the connector point on the secondary base mounted pump.

upgrade the fitting to a tee connector. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 137 .Notice that you do not have to draw the 2 vertical pipes to connect to the pumps. as shown. these pipe connections were created automatically. 3D view of parallel-connected base mounted pumps Add pipe to create a closed loop system 34 In the 3D view. 35 Using the method learned previously. zoom in to the elbow fitting on the left (secondary) base mounted pump.

right-click the bottom control on the tee. Move the cursor down until the status bar indicates that the alignment is at the intersection and vertical with the pipe shown. ■ ■ On the Options Bar. for Offset. select the tee connector in the secondary base mounted pump.36 Draw pipe to connect the base mounted pipes to the return: ■ In the plan view. ■ Move the cursor down. 138 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . and click Draw Pipe. and click to create the pipe. type 1'. and press Enter. enter 9' 6''.

Validate flow propagation through the supply system 38 In the plan view. Next. select the pipe from the secondary base mounted pump to the supply pipe.37 Click Modify. You now have a closed loop system. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 139 . you validate the flow through the system. and click Element Properties. right-click.

select the following pipes: ■ Supply pipe. for Cooling Water Flow. 140 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . notice that Flow is 125 GPM. 43 Press Esc. the value is 0 GPM. 48 In the plan view. which is rounded up to 63 GPM (1/2 of 125 GPM). 44 In the 3D view. The flow is being propagated through the piping. The cooling tower propagates flow through the inlet and outlet connectors. 41 Using the same method. view the properties for the secondary pump. 46 Press Esc. Flow is not currently passing through the cooling tower because it is not yet connected to the hydronic piping system. under Mechanical. ■ Upper pipe going to the cooling tower (inlet). under Mechanical. you can specify the Flow Factors for the 2 pumps as any combination that adds up to 100%. 40 Click Cancel. Connect the cooling tower Next. The Flow Factor for the primary pump is set to 50% also. In the Instance Properties dialog.50 or 50% of the Flow. notice that under Mechanical. notice that the Flow Factor is a parameter that is . 42 Click OK. as shown. 45 In the Instance Properties dialog. When you create the pumps in parallel. and click OK. select the cooling tower.39 In the Instance Properties dialog. and click Element Properties. you physically connect the cooling tower piping to propagate flow. right-click. 47 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Extend drop-down ➤ Trim/Extend Multiple Elements.

49 Press Esc.■ Lower pipe (outlet). Both pipes for the cooling tower are automatically connected to the piping system. NOTE Piping colors update based on specified filters. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 141 .

142 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .rvt. and close the dialog. You also add shut-off valves to control the flow to and from the cooling tower. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you add valves to model the piping for 2 modes: cooling mode and heating mode. and is heated by the boiler. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open.50 In the 3D View. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_05_i. 52 Close the file with or without saving it. You add a bypass valve to stop the flow and direct it to the cooling tower (cooling mode). and open the Instance Properties dialog to validate that the flow is propagating correctly through the cooling tower. select the cooling tower. 51 Verify that the value for Cooling Water Flow is 125 GPM. When the valve is open. the water bypasses the cooling tower. click Training Files. Adding Valves In this exercise.

6 Click Place Pipe Accessory tab ➤ Element panel. NOTE Be careful to select a bypass valve in this step. 5 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Accessory. and click the top Rotate control to rotate the valve to a horizontal position. 7 Click the center of the pipe to place the valve.Design is highlighted. 3 Click the section of pipe between the supply in and supply out pipes to the cooling tower. and select Ball Valve . indicating that it’s the active view. verify that the Diameter value is 3''. The bypass valve is closed by default.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . Adding Valves | 143 . as shown. Rotate the valve 9 Select the valve.2-6 Inch Bypass : 3'' from the Type Selector drop-down. 2 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building.HVAC Plan . 8 Press Esc twice.Place a bypass valve to control flow to the cooling tower 1 In the Project Browser. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 4 On the Options Bar.

Place shut-off valves 11 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Accessory. 13 Click to place the valve at the midpoint of the supply pipe to the cooling tower. parallel to the previously placed valve. 14 Using the same method.2-6 Inch : 4'' from the Type Selector drop-down. 144 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .10 Press Esc. 12 Select Ball Valve . 15 Click Place Pipe Accessory tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. place another Ball Valve .2-6 Inch Bypass : 4'' valve on the return pipe for the cooling tower.

validate that the Flow is 125 GPM.2-6 Inch Bypass : 3'' from the Type Selector drop-down. validate that the Flow is 125 GPM. 20 Select the bypass valve.2-6 Inch : 3'' from the Type Selector drop-down. You bypass the cooling tower with hot water coming from the boiler. validate the following flow values: ■ ■ ■ For the pipe below the bypass valve. For the top horizontal pipe (flow to the cooling tower). You add valves to the cooling tower to enable the system to alternately run in heating mode. and click OK. you want to shut off the flow of water into the cooling tower.Rotate both valves 16 Click the top Rotate control to the left of each valve to rotate the valve as shown. Add valves to facilitate a dual mode system 17 Select the small piece of pipe above the bypass valve. right-click. under Mechanical. For the bottom horizontal pipe (flow from the cooling tower). validate that the Flow value is 0 GPM. In heating mode. and click Element Properties. Adding Valves | 145 . 19 Using the same method. verify that Flow is 0 GPM. and select Ball Valve . Modify valves to bypass the cooling tower Currently the system is designed to run in cooling mode. and select Ball Valve . 18 In the Instance Properties dialog.) 21 Select the 2 regular valves (in open position). (This valve allows the water to flow through it.

Initially. validate the following: ■ ■ ■ The flow going into the cooling tower is 0 GPM. indicating that it’s the active view. The flow traveling through the bypass section of pipe is 125 GPM. you verify automatically calculated pipe size and flow parameters. as shown. 146 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. Sizing Pipe In this exercise. The color-coded display allows you to quickly see differing sizes and flow of piping. click Training Files. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_06_i.22 Using the method you just learned. Display the pipe color scheme legend 1 In the Project Browser.Design is highlighted.HVAC Plan . 3 Click to place the color scheme legend in the area to the right of the piping system. The flow coming out of the cooling tower is 0 GPM. You then use a combination of friction and velocity to size the pipes appropriately. you use the pipe color scheme legend as a color-coded reference to view the flow within the pipes and the sizing. 23 Close the file with or without saving it. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Color Schemes panel ➤ Pipe Legend. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open.

select Pipe Color Fill . This option displays the pipes in colors based on flow values. click Pipe Color Fill .Flow. and click OK. 7 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. and click Modify Pipe Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. 8 Press Esc to clear the selection.Size. Display the color fill based on pipe size 6 Select the Color Scheme Legend. and click OK. This display will help you size the pipe using friction and velocity sizing methods. Sizing Pipe | 147 .4 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog. for Schemes. 5 Compare the legend to the color coding in the drawing to verify that the flow values are as expected.

Select And. for Branch Sizing. Click OK. select Larger of Connector and Calculated. It does not report the sizing settings of the selected pipe segment or pipe run.Size the pipe using friction and velocity methods 9 Zoom in to the section of pipe connecting the boiler to the parallel base mounted pumps. select Friction. 148 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . Under Constraints. 13 Press Esc. enter 5 FPS. The piping increases in diameter based on the friction and velocity values specified. 11 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Duct/Pipe Sizing. and click to select the branch. 12 In the Pipe Sizing dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Sizing Method. and for Velocity. press Tab 3 times (so that the status bar indicates that you’ve highlighted a branch in a pipe network up to a piece of equipment). and enter 2.25 FT/100ft. 10 Move the cursor over the pipe between the primary and secondary base mounted pumps. IMPORTANT The Pipe Sizing dialog displays the sizing settings that were last used.

select a different layout solution. pressure.Design ➤ 3D Views. Inspecting the System | 149 . Inspecting the System In this exercise. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_07_i. or manually modify the pipe. you use the System Inspector to inspect the Level 3 hydronic piping system. and double-click 3D HVAC Building. Either relocate the system components. The most common cause of these errors is that there is insufficient space to create the pipe. you can easily detect problem areas in your design and resolve them immediately. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . Using the System Inspector. and pressure loss by placing the cursor over a pipe or mechanical equipment that you assigned to the system.rvt.IMPORTANT Errors may occur while you are attempting to create pipe geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing. 2 Select the section of the return piping (magenta) between the 2 water source heat pumps on the upper level. The System Inspector lets you inspect each piping system for flow. or offset elevations are incorrect. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. Inspect the system 1 In the Project Browser. 14 Close the file with or without saving it. Remember to always check pipe connectivity after modification. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

The pipe and the system components must be connected to a system (logical connection) and a system must contain pipe (physical connection). An inspection flag reports the section number. Arrows display on the pipe indicating the flow direction for both the main and the branches in the pipe system. The critical flow (indicated by red arrows) is in the main line going to the boiler. the selected system components and pipe must be logically and physically connected. NOTE Zoom in to the piping to see the arrows clearly. flow. 150 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . NOTE To use the System Inspector to inspect flow and pressure inside pipe. as required. and pressure information including pressure loss. 5 Place the cursor over the same section of return piping. 4 Click System Inspector tab ➤ System Inspector panel ➤ Inspect. This information helps you modify the system design.3 Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ System Inspector.

8 In the Instance Properties dialog. Checking Piping Systems | 151 . and click OK. and notice that the Static Pressure is 7. select 90° F. 11 Close the file with or without saving it. you need to validate them. Note that the Flow is 80 GPM. the Static Pressure is 7.Modify fluid temperature 6 Place the cursor over the section of pipe (Section 6) between the 2 WSHPs on the lower level. and the Pressure Loss is 1. targeting those systems that need attention.88 psi. Training File ■ Click ➤ Open. Checking Piping Systems Revit MEP uses both the pipe geometry and the system to perform calculations such as flow and pressure. inspect Section 6 again.65 psi and the Pressure Loss is 1. you use the Check Pipe Systems tool to quickly check these connections for all systems throughout your project. 7 Click System Inspector tab ➤ System Inspector panel ➤ Properties.67 psi. Because both the logical (system) and physical (pipe) connections play a vital role in the overall systems design. and to size pipe. 9 Using the same method. In this exercise.89 psi. 10 Click Finish. for Fluid Temperature. as shown.

the Unassigned folder will be empty and Check Pipe Systems will no longer display not empty warnings. 4 In the System Browser.Design. right-click the Systems titlebar. 6 In the Project Browser. Pipe that is associated with a default system (located in the Unassigned folder) is not checked. the water source heat pump is listed in the assigned system and assigned to the Default Hydronic Sanitary system in the Unassigned folder. and for pipe sizing. After you assign components to a system. IMPORTANT The most common check systems warning is: default system is not empty.Design. Use the System Browser to confirm piping system assignments 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. NOTE The check systems warnings contain a system type and a description.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . Notice that these warnings indicate that the Default systems are not empty. all system components must be assigned to a system after they are placed. double-click Level 1 . This occurs when the assigned system component can be connected to multiple systems (it contains different system connectors). The dashed red lines represent the logical connection. As you learned when placing components. 8 Expand Condensing Boiler: 500 MBH. Note that only physical connections associated with an assigned system are checked. These warnings can refer to both physical connection issues (such as a disconnected or problematic pipe) or logical connection issues (such as an improperly assigned system). The default system is placed in the Unassigned folder until you select the system components and create a system for them.Design ➤ Floor Plans. Perform a systems check 1 In the Project Browser. Remember that after you create pipe to physically connect a system. You will check the mechanical piping components to learn how to use the System Browser to confirm specified and default system assignments. Revit MEP checks both the logical (system) and the physical (pipe) connections of each piping system throughout the project. Revit MEP creates a default system and assigns them to it in order to perform system calculations. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Check Systems panel ➤ Check Pipe Systems. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . Warnings display. A dialog lets you click Show multiple times for different views. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_08_i. Revit MEP moves them from the Unassigned folder to their assigned systems folder. thus assigning the components to a system. For example. In the System Browser. 152 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . and double-click Level 3 . click Training Files. you assigned a water source heat pump to a supply hydronic system. Pipe geometry is used for system flow and pressure calculations. 5 Verify that Systems and Piping are selected. under which the mechanical equipment that was assigned to the system is listed. the pipe is associated with that system. 7 In the System Browser.HVAC Plan . After you have assigned all components to systems. expand the Hydronic Supply folder and notice that the Condensing Boiler: 500 MBH is listed. 9 Right-click CHWS. and click View.Design ➤ Floor Plans. and you have not yet assigned the component to the other systems. and click Show to view all of the system components. notice the CHWS (Chilled Water Supply System) is listed.rvt. but the same component has a sanitary system connector that you have not assigned to a system. Note that a system component may be listed in both its assigned system and in the Unassigned folder.HVAC Plan . If you place components without assigning them to a system.

14 Using the methods that you learned. The return system that you created (CHWR) is listed along with the boiler and the water source heat pumps (WSHPs) that you assigned to this system. Checking Piping Systems | 153 . otherwise. and select Level 3 . 15 Close the file with or without saving it. You have confirmed and validated both unassigned and assigned system components and their systems. and click Expand All. 13 Right-click CHWR. click Close. and confirm unassigned system components. 12 In the System Browser.HVAC Plan .Design floor plan. expand the Unassigned folder.TIP If you have multiple views open. right-click Hydronic Return. 10 Using the same methods. and click Select to confirm this system and the assigned system components. you can click Show in the Show Element(s) In View dialog to switch between views. confirm the system and the system assignments for the Hydronic Supply system. 11 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Switch Windows drop-down.

154 .

Creating an Electrical System In this tutorial. you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan and design an electrical system. 155 .

156 .

Define required lighting.Planning an Electrical System 7 In this lesson. Color fill plan with required lighting levels ■ Create a space lighting analysis schedule 157 . You learn to: ■ ■ ■ Specify electrical settings. you complete the planning tasks associated with creating an electrical system. Assign space color fills according to required lighting levels.

wiring. select Copper. distribution systems. Add a wiring type 3 In the left pane. 2 In the Electrical Settings dialog: ■ ■ In the left pane. Click OK. and demand factors that are applied in the design. expand Wiring . enter 1. In this exercise you review electrical settings. For Material. select 90. As you place components and create circuits.Wire Sizes. 4 Click Add and in the Electrical Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name. Select Correction Factor. enter THHN. ■ Click New Correction Factor. ■ ■ For Factor.04.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Add a correction factor 1 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Electrical Settings. select Wiring Types. select Copper. and open Imperial\RME_Elec_Planning_01_i. For Temperature. You also add a wiring type. For Temperature Rating. select 75. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar.Specifying Electrical Settings Electrical settings determine the voltages. ■ ■ For Material. click Training Files. speeding up the design phase. Revit MEP checks to ensure that components are compatible with the specified voltages and distribution systems. click (Open). 158 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System .

■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

For Insulation, select THHN. For Max Size, enter 2000. For Neutral Multiplier, enter 1.0. Select Neutral Required. For Neutral Size, select Hot Conductor Size. For Conduit Type, select Steel.

Add a voltage definition 5 In the left pane, select Voltage Definitions. The Voltage Definitions table is used to specify a range of voltages that are used with your voltage definitions. By specifying a range, you allow circuits to be created between components with rated voltages that do not precisely match the voltage definition value. 6 Click Add and in the Electrical Settings dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■

For Name, enter 240. For Value, enter 240. For Minimum, enter 220. For Maximum, enter 250.

Add a distribution system 7 In the left pane, select Distribution Systems. Note the 3 distribution systems listed. 8 Click Add and in the Electrical settings dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

For Name, enter 120/240. For Phase, select Single. For Wires, select 3. For L-L Voltage, select 240. For L-G Voltage, select 120.

Specify demand factors 9 In the left pane, select Demand Factors. You can specify demand factors that let you adjust the rating of the main service for the building. 10 In the Electrical Settings dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

For Load Classification, select Power. Under More Than, select 10000 VA. Click Split. Select 20000 VA and for Demand Factor, enter 50. Click OK.

11 Close the file with or without saving it. Next you create a schedule to define required lighting levels. Then you assign lighting levels to spaces.

Specifying Electrical Settings | 159

Defining Required Lighting
In this exercise, you specify the lighting levels that are required for the different spaces within the building, such as offices, restrooms, and conference rooms. You begin by adding a new Project Parameter (Required Lighting Level), then you create a Key Schedule that links your new parameter to the various types of spaces in your project. Key schedules provide an efficient way to create an instance parameter that can be used to map specific parameter values to particular key styles. In this case the key style is the type of space and, because the key is linked to your new project parameter, its value becomes the Required Lighting Level. Later in the tutorial, you will use the new parameter again to compare the value for Required Lighting Level against the actual illumination provided by fixtures that you place in the plan. Training File
■ ■

On the Quick Access toolbar, click

(Open).

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\RME_Elec_Planning_02_i.rvt.

Add a project parameter for lighting 1 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Parameters. 2 In the Project Parameters dialog, click Add. 3 In the Parameter Properties dialog, under Parameter Data:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

For Name, enter Required Lighting Level. For Discipline, select Electrical. For Type of Parameter, select Illuminance. For Group Parameter Under, select Electrical - Lighting. Under Categories, select Spaces. Verify that Instance is selected. Click OK twice. The Required Lighting Level project parameter has been added and will appear as an instance parameter for all spaces, under the Electrical - Lighting group in the space element properties.

Verify the new parameter 4 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Lighting - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click Level 2 - Lighting Plan. 5 In the drawing area, zoom in on the lower left corner and use the crosshair as a guide to select Space 218.

6 Click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.

160 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System

7 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Electrical - Lighting, note the Required Lighting Level parameter. Click OK. Create a schedule for required lighting levels 8 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Schedules drop-down ➤ Schedule/Quantities. 9 In the New Schedule dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■

For Category, select Spaces. For Name, enter Space Lighting Requirements. Select Schedule Keys, and for Key Name, enter Lighting Levels. Click OK.

10 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, under Available Fields, double-click Required Lighting Level, and click OK. The schedule displays and includes a title and column headings. 11 Double-click the column boundary to the right of each column to adjust the column to fit the text.

Add space lighting requirements to the schedule table 12 Click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ New. 13 In the Key Name column of the first row, enter Open Office. 14 In the first row of the Required Lighting Level column, enter 45. 15 Adjust the column boundaries as needed.

16 Click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ New to add 13 more rows. 17 Complete the table by entering the following:

The fc value is automatically applied as the parameter is based upon illuminance parameter type, which is mapped to project units. Notice that as you enter the data, the rows are automatically sorted by Key Name. You can change the sort/grouping to sort by Required Lighting Level.

Defining Required Lighting | 161

Change the sort order of the schedule 18 Right-click in the schedule and click View Properties. 19 In the Instance Properties dialog, for Sorting/Grouping, click Edit. 20 In the Schedule Properties dialog:
■ ■

For Sort By, select Required Lighting Level. Select Blank Line.

21 Click OK twice. The entries in the schedule are sorted by Required Lighting Level.

22 Using the same method, change the sort order back to the default setting. The entries in the schedule are sorted by Key Name. Apply a lighting level to spaces 23 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting - Design ➤ Floor Plans and open Level 2 - Lighting Plan. 24 Zoom to Space 218 and select the space element.

25 Click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Note that under Electrical-Lighting, that Required Lighting Level is blank. 26 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Identity Data, for Lighting Levels, select Instruction-Standard. Notice that the Required Lighting Level now has a value of 50 fc and the field is dimmed, since the Lighting Level is set to use the value assigned to the Instruction-Standard key value. The

162 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System

only way to change the value is to either select a different Lighting Level key, select None for Lighting Level and type a specific value, or edit the Required Lighting Level key schedule for the selected key. Since Required Lighting Level is an instance parameter, the value input applies only to the selected space. 27 Click OK. You can apply a key schedule to multiple spaces at the same time by selecting the spaces and specifying the lighting levels in the Electrical properties dialog.

28 Close the file with or without saving it. Next you create a color fill scheme for space lighting.

Creating Color Fills and Schedules
Revit MEP lets you add color fills to spaces based on specific space parameters. Space color fill plans and schedules can be helpful as design tools and as design communications documents. In this exercise, you will create a space color fill plan using the lighting levels that you specified in the previous exercise. Space color fills can be used with any parameter that exists for the space components. Later in this exercise, you create a space lighting analysis schedule to aid in the layout of your lighting design. The schedule includes a calculated lighting delta value, which is the difference between the required and the calculated illuminance values. Training File
■ ■

On the Quick Access toolbar, click

(Open).

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\RME_Elec_Planning_03_i.rvt.

Create a color fill legend scheme 1 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel drop-down ➤ Color Schemes. 2 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog:
■ ■

Under Schemes, for Category, select Spaces. Under Schemes, click (Duplicate).

3 In the New Color Scheme dialog, for Name, enter Required Lighting and click OK. 4 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog:
■ ■

Under Scheme Definition, for Title, enter Required Lighting Levels. For Color, select Required Lighting Level, and click OK to dismiss the alert message.

5 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog:

Under Scheme Definition, verify the By Range is selected.

Creating Color Fills and Schedules | 163

Select the scheme for At Least 20.00 fc, and click (Add Value). This command adds a new value based on the split value of the unit you are adding the new value after. For example, if you select the value for 20 fc and click Add, then the new value will be 40 fc. If you select the value for 20 fc again and click Add, then the new value will be 30 fc or half of the difference between the two values you are adding.

With the scheme for At Least 20. 00 fc still selected, click

(Add Value) again.

Select the scheme for At Least 40.00 fc, and click

(Add Value).

■ ■ ■

Select the scheme for 30.00 fc, and click

(Add Value).

Select the scheme for 50.00 fc, enter 75.00, and press ENTER. Select the scheme for 40.00 fc, enter 50.00, and press ENTER.

Click OK.

Add a legend and apply the color scheme 6 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Lighting - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click Level 2 - Lighting CF. 7 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel ➤ Legend. 8 In the drawing area, click to place the legend to the right of the drawing. 9 In the Choose Space Type and Color Scheme dialog:
■ ■ ■

For Space Type, select Spaces. For Color Scheme, select Required Lighting. Click OK.

The color fill plan displays the required illuminance levels based on the key values previously created.

164 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System

Create a space lighting analysis schedule 10 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Schedules drop-down ➤ Schedule/Quantities. 11 In the New Schedule dialog:
■ ■

For Category, select Spaces. For Name, enter Space Lighting Analysis and click OK.

12 In the Schedule Properties dialog, for Available Fields, double-click Number, Name, Level, Average Estimated Illumination, and Required Lighting Level. 13 Click Calculated Value. 14 In the Calculated Value dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■

For Name, enter Lighting Delta. For Discipline, select Electrical. For Type, select Illuminance. For Formula, click Browse.
■ ■

In the Fields dialog, select Average Estimated Illumination. Click OK.

In the Calculated Value dialog, for Formula, at the end of Average Estimated Illumination, press the spacebar, type a hyphen, and click Browse.
■ ■

In the Fields dialog, select Required Lighting Level. Click OK twice.

15 In the Schedule Properties dialog:
■ ■ ■

On the Sorting/Grouping tab, for Sort by, select Level. Select Header. Select Blank Line. On the Formatting tab, for Fields, select Lighting Delta. Click Conditional Format.

In the Conditional Formatting dialog, under Condition, for Test, select Not Between.

Creating Color Fills and Schedules | 165

The lighting delta values that are not within the conditional value of -5 fc and 5 fc are highlighted in red. 16 Close the file with or without saving it. Click OK three times. 166 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . select Red. for Custom Colors.■ ■ For Value. enter -5 fc and 5 fc. ■ ■ In the Color dialog. Click Background Color.

Balance wire sizes and breaker service. Then. you place lighting fixtures in the drawing. you modify the color plan to illustrate the space by the Average Estimated Illumination values. Create circuits (with and without wire) to create the logical connections between devices and fixtures. You learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Add devices and fixtures using schedule to satisfy required lighting levels. 167 .Designing an Electrical System 8 In this lesson. as you place lighting fixtures. Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills In this exercise. using the color fill plan and the space analysis schedule as an aid in lighting placement to satisfy required lighting levels. you create electrical systems (including lighting circuits. These values are based on internal lighting level calculations which use the space floor and wall reflectance values and workplane height to automatically calculate average illuminance or lighting levels. Create power loads. and switch systems) by establishing logical connections between electrical components. you verify illuminance values to indicate when the lighting level requirements have been satisfied. Create a panel schedule. First. power circuits. Use the System Browser to check your design.

168 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . select the color for Less Than 20. we can quickly identify those areas of the building that do not meet the specified lighting requirements. 2 In the drawing area. 6 Press ESC to deselect the legend. select Average Estimated Illumination. click Training Files. Modify the color fill plan 1 Verify that the Level 2 .00 fc. By using orange as the color for this range.Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. select Orange.00 fc. Notice that the Library has an average estimated illumination less than 20. 4 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog: ■ Under Schemes. ■ ■ ■ 5 Click OK. click (Open). for Basic Colors. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Click OK. In the Color dialog. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_01_i.rvt. Under Scheme Definition. then modify the color scheme legend to use the color fill plan as a design tool for many tasks.Lighting Color Fill view is open. You can create additional color schemes. for the Spaces Category. select the color legend. 3 Click Modify Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme.

277. The color fill will change colors as lighting fixtures are placed that raise the illumination level above 20 fc.Design ➤ Ceiling Plans and open the Level 2 . 9 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 15 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Lighting Fixture. Note that the lighting delta can be cleared. Windows are arranged in a counter-clockwise order. the illumination values in the color fill plan and schedule analysis will automatically update.Lighting Ceiling plan. Add fixtures 14 In the drawing area. The order of the tiled windows is determined by the order in which the windows were activated. 16 Click Place Fixture tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select Recessed Parabolic Light: 2’x2’ (2 Lamp) . The schedule indicates the Average Estimated Illumination as yellow for values of 0 fc (conditional format). The color fill plan also indicates in orange an illumination value below 20 fc. The colors will coincide with the values in the color fill legend. 12 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. with the last activated window appearing in the upper-left corner. indicating a value greater than 0 fc.7 In the Project Browser. 8 In the Project Browser. 11 Click the Space Lighting Analysis view to make it active.277VM_Plain Recessed Lighting Fixture 600x600 . all three of these colored fields will clear to white.5 fc range specified in the conditional format of this field. 13 Click the Level 2 . The red field will clear once the +/. which is the lowest value in the specified range. Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 169 . expand Schedule/Quantities and open the Space Lighting Analysis view. 10 Click the Level 2 Color Fill_Lighting Plan view to make it active. All of this works as a visual aid for the designer to insure design requirements are met.Lighting Ceiling Plan view to make it active. however the color fill plan can display within the range below the specified value because of the +/. zoom to space Library 219. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting . As you add lighting fixtures to the Library. As you add lighting fixtures to the Library.5 fc range is satisfied. and the Lighting Delta as red for values out of the +/.5 fc range. 17 Click Place Fixture tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Place on Face.

the lighting delta and average estimated illumination for space Library 219 are updated. the fixtures will move accordingly. select Multiple. 18 Click to place the fixture. so that as the ceiling plan moves vertically. NOTE This option must be selected in order for lighting information to be updated in the color fill plan and schedule. verify that the option for Calculate Coefficient of Utilization is selected. 22 In the Instance Properties dialog. 26 Use the Copy command to place 2 more fixtures as shown. 19 Press ESC to end the command. 24 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. In the Space Lighting Analysis view. 21 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 20 Select the lighting fixture. 23 Click OK.The Place on Face option allows the fixtures to be hosted by the ceiling plan. 25 On the Options Bar. 170 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .

Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 171 . 28 In the drawing area. 29 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 27 Press ESC to end the command. select Multiple. 31 Click in the drawing area to place 6 additional groups of fixtures as shown. select the 3 fixtures. 30 On the Options Bar.NOTE Object snaps are used for selecting intersections of the ceiling grid.

33 Click to activate the Schedule window. Modify multiple fixture instances 34 Select the vertical center group of light fixtures. Note the value in red for the space Library 219. The values in the Space Lighting Analysis view are updated automatically.32 Press ESC. 172 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .

36 In the Filter dialog. 37 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select Recessed Parabolic Light: 2’x4’ (2 Lamp) .35 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter.277V. and for Category. Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 173 . Click OK. click Check None. select Lighting Fixtures.

38 Click to activate the Color Fill_Lighting Plan view.The values in the schedule are updated automatically. Note the changes for the space Library 219. 174 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .

Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 175 . 42 In the drawing area. select Multiple Alignment.39 Repeat the previous steps to change the same group of fixtures to Recessed Parabolic Light: 2’x4’ (3 Lamp) . The lighting delta is satisfied. Note the changes for the space Library 219. 40 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Align. 41 On the Options Bar. click the ceiling grid line as shown.277V.

The fixture aligns. 176 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 44 Repeat the previous step to align the remaining fixtures.43 Click the left edge of the first fixture.

45 Press ESC to end the command. you modify the IES data of the light fixtures with the goal of maximizing the lighting output using the fewest number of fixtures. In the next exercise. click Training Files. click (Open). Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures | 177 . 46 Close the file with or without saving it. you modify the light fixture IES files. Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures In this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_02_i.rvt.

4 In the Level 2 Lighting Plan view. 5 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 178 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 2 Tile the views as shown. zoom to space Library 219 and select the lighting fixture shown. 6 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ Click Edit Type. 3 In the Space Lighting Analysis schedule view. scroll to view space space Library 219. Expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans and open Level 2 .Design ➤ Floor Plans and open the Level 2 .Lighting Plan.Create a new lighting fixture type 1 In the Project Browser. Expand Schedules/Quantities and open Space Lighting Analysis.Lighting Color Fill plan. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting . Note the Average Estimated Illumination value of 46 fc.

Under Electrical. ■ ■ ■ ■ In the Initial Intensity dialog. click the value for Light Loss Factor. Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures | 179 . select Xenon and click OK. ■ ■ ■ In the Light Loss Factor dialog. enter . for Ballast Loss Factor. Note that in the Space Lighting Analysis Schedule. the Lighting Delta for the Library is updated. for Lamp.85.00 lm.93. for Color Preset. click the value for Photometric Web File and click Browse. for Name enter 2’x4’ (3 Lamp) T5_HO_54W . enter F15. select T5 [HO]. for Apparent Load.■ In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ Click Duplicate. Under Photometrics. ■ In the Initial Color dialog. click the value for Initial Intensity. For Luminaire Dirt Depreciation. Under Photometrics. Note the lighting type has changed to F14. specify 15000.ies and click Open. for Type Mark.277V and click OK. Click OK. ■ Click Apply. enter 162. Under Photometrics.00 VA. Under Identity Data. enter . Apply the lighting fixture type 8 Select all the fixtures in the center column in the Library as shown. ■ Under Photometrics. click the value for Initial Color. In the Select File dialog. In the Name dialog. ■ Click OK twice. ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Electrical Loads. and click OK. select Luminous Flux. 7 Press ESC to deselect the fixture. select 463T5_S.

277V. Click OK. 12 Press ESC to deselect the fixtures. click Check None.9 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. Remove lighting fixtures 13 Select the 3 lighting fixtures in the center column of the Library as shown. 10 In the Filter dialog. 11 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select 2’x4’ (3 Lamp) T5_HO_54W . Note that the selected lighting fixtures have been updated. and that the lighting delta for the Library in the Space Lighting Analysis Schedule also has been updated. 180 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . select Lighting Fixtures. and for Category.

15 In space Library 219.Press Delete. Note the lighting delta updates again. Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures | 181 . Apply the fixture type to other fixtures 14 Click Modify tab ➤ Clipboard panel ➤ Match Type. select the top center fixture. 16 Click the other fixtures in the center to apply the fixture type.

182 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Note that the lighting delta for the Library has been updated again.17 Click Match Fixtures tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. Remove lighting fixtures 18 Select the 2 lighting fixtures as shown.

Place lighting switches 1 Verify that the Level 2 Lighting Plan view is open. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. junction boxes.Press Delete. click (Open). 19 Close the file with or without saving it. 2 In the drawing area. Junction Boxes. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. and Receptacles In this exercise you add switches for the lighting switches and the receptacles in your project. click Training Files. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_03_i. and Receptacles | 183 . Placing Switches. In the next exercise. Junction Boxes. The procedure for placing switches and receptacles is the same as for placing any hosted components in Revit MEP. Placing Switches. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. The lighting delta has been updated and is now 0. you add switches. and receptacles to your design.

184 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .277V. 5 Click Place Lighting Device tab ➤ Placement tab ➤ Place on Vertical Face. 7 Click to place the switch. it is only previewed when the cursor is over a wall. Because the switch requires a wall to serve as the host.3 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Lighting. 6 Position the switch on the interior wall as shown. 4 Click Place Lighting Device tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select Wall Occupancy Sensor .Regular Voltage: Passive Infrared .

9 Press ESC to end the command. Junction Boxes.NoLoad. Place junction boxes 10 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Electrical Fixture.NoLoad: 4” Square is selected in the Type Selector. 13 Position the junction box in space Computer Lab 222 as shown. and Receptacles | 185 . 12 In the Load Family dialog. Select Junction Boxes . browse to Revit MEP ➤ Imperial Library ➤ Electrical Components ➤ Power Devices.8 Place a second switch of the same type on the other side of the wall as shown. 11 Click Place Devices tab ➤ Model panel ➤ Load Family. The element type Junction Boxes . Placing Switches.rfa and click Open.

expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Power .14 Press ESC to end the command. note that Apparent Load is set to 0. NOTE When entering values. enter 9’0”. Click OK twice. In the Type Properties dialog. 18 Press ESC to deselect the junction box. 16 Click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. for Mark. Under Electrical. you can enter a space to separate the unit values.Offset. note the Number of Poles is 1. enter JB-1NL. zoom to space Library 219. Click Edit Type. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data.Design ➤ Floor Plans and open the Level 2 Power Plan view. Place wall-hosted receptacles 19 In the Project Browser. 21 In the drawing area. 20 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Close Hidden to close other views that may be open. 17 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ Under Constraints. 186 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . for Level 2 . 15 Select the junction box.

25 In the Column Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click Check None.22 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. expand Unassigned and scroll space Library 219. dock the System Browser at the bottom of your window. Select Size. 23 In the System Browser. This list displays connectors and circuits that have not been assigned to a panel. Expand Electrical. Select Load. NOTE If necessary. and Number of Elements. Right-click the column heading again and click View ➤ Electrical. Space Number. Placing Switches. right-click the a column heading and click View ➤ Systems. Junction Boxes. and Receptacles | 187 . 24 For any column. right-click and click Column Settings. 26 In the System Browser. Space Name. Distribution System. and Voltage. Click OK. Note that the values for the space Library 219 are currently blank. Expand General.

188 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 28 Click Place Devices tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select Duplex Receptacle: Standard. 35 Select the dimension and enter 12’. 29 Click to place 2 receptacles in space Library 219 as shown. 34 Drag the grip to move the witness line to the receptacle on the left as shown. 31 Close the System Browser. 30 Scroll the System Browser to see the added receptacles.27 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Electrical Fixture. Reposition the receptacle 32 Select the receptacle on the right. 33 Position the cursor on the Move Witness Line grip as shown.

Placing Switches. 36 Press ESC to deselect the receptacle.The receptacle on the right is repositioned according to the dimension you enter. 39 Click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. and Receptacles | 189 . select Copy and Multiple. 38 Select the receptacle. Place additional receptacles 37 Repeat the previous steps to place a third receptacle in space Library 219 as shown. Junction Boxes. 40 On the Options Bar.

enter 12’ and press ENTER to place another receptacle. 190 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 42 Move the cursor down.41 Click the midpoint of the receptacle. and enter 12’ and press ENTER. move the cursor along the wall.

and Receptacles | 191 .43 Press ESC to end the command. Placing Switches. Junction Boxes.

45 Click Place Device tab ➤ Element panel drop-down and select Duplex Receptacle: Standard.Place floor-hosted receptacles 44 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Electrical Fixture. 192 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 46 Click Place Devices tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Place on Face. 47 Click to place 3 floor receptacles as shown.

Next you create lighting circuits and show wire. The following diagram shows the connectivity for your electrical Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 193 .48 Close the file with or without saving it. Although the connections between this type of equipment are not typically shown on plans. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire In this exercise you add the electrical equipment for the distribution systems in your plan. you need to create logical connections to define the topology.

Add panelboards 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan view is open. 3 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Electrical Equipment. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_04_i. You start at the low voltage panels (L-1 and L-2). zoom to the space Electrical 220.rvt. click (Open). 194 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . and work toward the higher voltage. 2 In the drawing area. In this exercise you also become more familiar with the wiring settings. then create lighting circuitry and add wiring as the circuits are created.equipment. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. click Training Files. Adding wiring to a project is optional. main distribution panels (H-2 and MDP).

Loads.Surface: 100A panelboard as shown. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 195 .Surface: 100A. 11 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Electrical . For Panel Name. #1 Pole Breakers. 10 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Click OK. 16 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. select 120/208 Wye. 8 Select the panelboard. 5 Click Place Equipment tab ➤ Placement Panel ➤ Place on Vertical Face. enter PP-2B. 15 On the Options Bar. 13 Repeat the previous steps to place a 480V MCB Lighting and Appliance Panelboard .4 Click Place Equipment tab ➤ Element panel drop-down and select 208V MCB Lighting and Appliance Panelboard . 9 On the Options Bar. for Distribution System. 7 Press ESC to end the command. 12 Press ESC to deselect the panelboard. select 480/277 Wye. for Distribution System. enter 20. 14 Select the panelboard. 6 Click to place the panelboard as shown. for Max.

for Max.Loads. 21 Select all fixtures and switches in the space. zoom to space Instruction 221. 24 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Power.17 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Electrical . 22 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. #1 Pole Breakers. The blue sketch graphics show the created circuit. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans and open Level 2 Lighting Plan view. For Panel Name. Click OK. enter LP-2B. Click OK. Note that Apparent Load Phases are dimmed because they are calculated values. Add a circuit with wire 19 In the Project Browser. ■ 18 Press ESC to deselect the panelboard. enter 20. 23 In the Filter dialog. and for Category. click Check None. which is the logical connection between the elements. 20 In the drawing area. 196 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . select Lighting Devices and Lighting Fixtures.

Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 197 . The red sketch graphics show the logical circuit with the home run pointing toward the selected panel. 27 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc.25 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. 26 Select lighting panel LP-2B.

31 Click to place the switch in the drawing area as shown. Add a switch 29 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Lighting. 198 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 32 Press ESC. 33 Select the switch on the right. 30 Click Lighting Place Device tab ➤ Element panel drop-down and select Lighting Switches: Three Way.28 Press ESC to end the command.

right-click the connector and click Add to Circuit.34 Click Place Device tab ➤ Element panel and select Lighting Switches: Three Way from the Type Selector drop-down. 35 Select the left three-way switch. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 199 . 36 Click the top-left lighting fixture to add to the circuit.

41 In the Filter dialog. enter 2.37 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire This exercise is similar to the previous exercise in that you create circuits. select Wires. 39 Select all items in space Instruction 221. Next you create circuits without showing wire. Note that the tick marks are updated to show 4. Training File ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. click (Open). 40 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 42 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 43 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Electrical . and for Category. for Hot Conductors. 44 Close the file with or without saving it. click Check None. 38 Press ESC to end the command. Click OK.Loads. except without wire. 200 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Click OK.

13 In the System Browser. expand Power. and click View ➤ Systems and Electrical. Expand Electrical. click Training Files. 4 Right-click the connector and click Create Power Circuit. ■ 16 In the System Browser. 12 Move the System Browser pane to the bottom of the screen for easier viewing. and then expand circuit 1. 5 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. 9 Select panel LP-2B in space Electrical 220. Check circuits 11 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. 15 In the Column Settings dialog: ■ ■ Expand General and review the settings. 6 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Add To Circuit. 3 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-left of the space. Distribution System. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_05_i. Rating. right-click on the Systems heading. 7 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-right and the lighting sensor. Click OK. 2 In the drawing area.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. 8 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Select Panel. Add a circuit without wire 1 Verify that the Level 2 Lighting Plan view is open. 14 Right-click on the Systems heading and click Column Settings. 10 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. and Voltage Drop are selected. 17 Scroll down and expand LP-2B. Voltage. and verify that Load. Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire | 201 .rvt. zoom to space Computer Lab 222.

26 Select the 4 remaining lighting fixtures and the other occupancy sensor in space Computer Lab 222. change the Voltage to 277V. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. 25 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Add To Circuit. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. 18 Expand circuit 2 and note the devices. 29 Move the cursor over one of the fixtures and press TAB 3 times to view the circuit. The System Browser is a useful tool for checking the design and locating components in your project. 30 Close the System Browser. right-click the connector and click Add to Circuit. Add additional devices to the circuit 19 In the drawing area. Note the addition of the junction box to circuit 2 in the System Browser. 202 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 28 Select one of the occupancy sensors. 27 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. The System Browser also provides the name and number of the space in which the devices are located. 20 Select the junction box and click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. View circuit information 24 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. 23 Move the cursor over one of the adjacent fixtures and click to select it. under Electrical.Note the circuit in space Instruction 221. 22 With the junction box still selected. The System Browser provides another way of viewing information about the circuits that are connected to a panel. Click OK.

39 In the Type Properties dialog. enter FR4. 43 Select the label name and click Modify Label tab ➤ Label panel ➤ Edit Label. 44 In the Edit Label dialog. Click Tags. Click Yes.Add tags to fixtures 31 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. click below the first one to place it. note the label parameters and click Cancel. 40 Click OK twice. 36 Select the upper-left fixture. 45 Click Modify Label tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Similar. 41 Press ESC to deselect the fixture. 34 Click each of the 6 lighting fixtures in space Computer Lab 222. under Identity Data. Notice that all 6 lighting fixture tags are updated. 47 In the drawing area. 38 In the Instance Properties dialog. 37 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire | 203 . select Lighting Fixture Tag: Standard. 35 Press ESC to end the command. for Type Mark. click Edit Type. 32 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Deselect Leader. Click OK. 33 In the Tags dialog: ■ ■ For Lighting Fixtures. 46 Click Place Label tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ Horizontal ➤ Center and Vertical ➤ Top. Edit tags 42 Select a tag and click Modify Lighting Fixture Tags tab ➤ Family panel ➤ Edit Family.

enter Lighting Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag. 56 In the Filter dialog. Creating a Switch System In this exercise you learn how to create a switch system. Note the tag is updated in the drawing area. select Circuit Number and Switch ID and click Add parameter(s) to label . enter a comma. Click OK. For Circuit Number. 52 In the Save As dialog. click Check None. select Lighting Fixture Tags. select Break. Next you create a switch system. Click Apply and note the label parameters are divided into 2 lines in the drawing area.48 In the Edit Label dialog: ■ Under Category Parameters. 53 Click Create tab ➤ Family Editor panel ➤ Load into Project. and for Category. and click Apply. Click Save. 50 Drag the handle on the right side of the tag to resize it by dragging it to the left. Add tags to remaining fixtures 54 Select all the elements in space Computer Lab 222. 51 Click ➤ Save As ➤ Family. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Wrap between parameters only. 49 Click Place Label tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. Note the tags are updated in the drawing area. 59 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. 58 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag All.rfa. for File Name. 61 Close the file with or without saving it. Click OK. Click OK. 60 Zoom out to see the tagged fixtures. select Lighting_Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag: Standard and click Apply. 57 Click Modify Lighting Fixture tab ➤ Element panel ➤ and select Lighting_Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag: Standard. Deselect Break and for Suffix. 204 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 55 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter.

Create a switch system 1 Verify that the Level 2 Lighting Plan view is open. 9 Select the occupancy sensor. click (Open). Click OK. 4 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Switch. 5 Click Modify Switch System tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Switch System. click Training Files. Creating a Switch System | 205 . 10 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Finish Editing System.Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar.rvt. 12 Select the occupancy sensor. enter a. 3 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-left of the space. 14 In the Instance Properties dialog. 11 Highlight the fixture and press TAB 4 times to see the switch system. 13 Click Modify Lighting Devices tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 8 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Select Switch. Note that the lighting fixture tags for the two fixtures are updated with the Switch ID. 7 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-right of the space. 2 In the drawing area. 6 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Add to System. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_06_i. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. under Electrical Lighting. In the left pane of the Open dialog. for Switch ID.

24 In the Instance Properties dialog. 22 Select the occupancy sensor on the bottom side of the wall. 18 Click Modify Switch Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Switch System. 25 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Finish Editing System. 20 Select the remaining 3 lighting fixtures. 19 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Add to System. for switch ID. Note the lighting fixture tags for the 4 fixtures below the wall are updated with the switch ID. under Electrical . 16 Select one of the lighting fixtures below the wall. 206 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .15 Press ESC to deselect the occupancy sensor. enter b. 17 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Switch. Click OK.Lighting. 23 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Switch Properties. 21 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Select Switch.

Click OK. In the left pane of the Open dialog. The concept of grouping similar functions into systems is used to show logical connections between different components in the system. and data systems. click Training Files. 7 In space Electrical 220. Creating Power Loads | 207 . and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_07_i. Add a circuit 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan view is open. lighting. and for Category. 3 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 4 In the Filter dialog. select Electrical Fixtures. click (Open). Creating Power Loads In this exercise you will learn methods for creating power circuits (circuit groups).26 Close the file with or without saving it. select the PP-2B panel. 6 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. 2 In the drawing area. Circuits are used for power. 5 Click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Power. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar.rvt. click Check None. zoom to space Instruction 221 and draw a pick box to select all the components in the space. Next you create a circuit and size wire.

and click Element Properties. 9 Press ESC to deselect the wires. select Wiring. 14 Click Insert tab ➤ Load from Library panel ➤ Load Family. navigate to Imperial Library ➤ Electrical Components ➤ TickMarks. 10 Right-click the wire for the home run to the panel. under Electrical . and in the drawing area. for Hot Conductors. 17 In the left pane of the Electrical Settings dialog.Loads. 19 Click OK. Click OK. 16 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Electrical Settings. select Hook Wire Tick Mark. 208 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . for Ground Wire Tick Mark. 15 In the Load Family dialog. 13 Select the wire again. 11 In the Instance Properties dialog. select Hook Wire Tick Mark. select Long Wire Tick Mark. click the minus symbol to delete a tick mark. enter 2.rfa. 12 Press ESC to deselect the wire. 18 For Neutral Wire Tick Mark. and click Open. and in the right pane. Notice the 3 tick marks is changed to 4 tickmarks.8 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc.

press Tab to display a preview of the circuit wiring. 21 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. Creating Power Loads | 209 . 24 Press ESC to deselect the wires. 25 Select the homerun from space Computer Lab 222 and the wire between the first and second receptacle in space Instruction 221. as shown. and click to select the circuit. select the PP-2B panel. Combine multiple homeruns into a multi-circuit homerun 20 Highlight one of the receptacles in space Computer Lab 222.The tick mark for all ground conductors are changed to a hooked tick marks and neutral conductors display as a long tick mark. 22 In space Electrical 220. 23 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc.

as shown. 28 In the drawing area. and then click the connector of the second receptacle as shown.26 Press Delete. click a point halfway between the first and second receptacle to create an arc. click the connector of the first receptacle. 29 In space Instruction 221. in space Instruction 221. add another wire between the connector on the last receptacle in 221. 27 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Wire drop-down ➤ Arc. Notice that there are now 4 tick marks on the homerun and the wiring for space Instruction 221 and a double arrowhead to indicate the multi-circuit homeruns. There are only 3 tick marks 210 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . and the connector on the nearest receptacle in space Computer Lab 222.

2 In the drawing area. Balancing Wire Size and Breaker Service | 211 . An additional hot conductor is added to the 221 wiring. you verify and adjust wire sizes that Revit MEP recommends for handling the loads on those circuits. Notice the triple arrowhead for the homerun. 3 In the Electrical space. This will reduce neutral current as well as prevent an excess voltage drop due to one phase being overloaded. Balancing Wire Size and Breaker Service In this exercise you begin by balancing the loads at the Level 1 and Level 2 panels. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. click Training Files. Balancing loads begins with adjusting the loads at the panels farthest from the power source. click Open. 30 Add wiring to space Electrical 220. Balance circuit loads 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan is open. select panel LP-2B. then you examine the loads presented at the panels to set your final breaker sizes. Circuit loads should be balanced to present as nearly as possible an equal load to each phase. and connect its wiring to a receptacle in space Instruction 221. 31 Close the file with or without saving it. Finally. Next you balance the loads for your design. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt.on the wiring that extends to the space Computer Lab 222. zoom to space Electrical 220. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_08_i.

Scroll down. 13 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. A warning indicates that the power system is empty and will be deleted. enter 30A. for Rating. Notice that the loads on Phase A. B. and C shows an imbalance with the heaviest load 6932 VA on Phase A. while Phase B provides 2004 VA. Phase B 3636 VA. ■ ■ Adjust circuit breaker sizes 9 Select panel PP-2B. Click OK.3712 VA. 1-#12. Revit MEP automatically calculates wire sizes based on circuit rating. click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Circuit Properties. 212 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 11 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Remove from Circuit.3616 VA). 12 Select panel PP-2B. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog for the circuit: ■ ■ Scroll down and note the current value for the Wire Size parameter is 3-#12. 6 Click OK. 1-#12. 5 In the Edit Circuits dialog. Verify and adjust wire sizes 7 With panel LP-2B still selected. 14 Close the warning dialog. 1-#10.4 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Circuits. and note the value for the Wire Size parameter is now 3-#10. and Phase C provides 2028 VA. 10 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. click Rebalance Loads. Under Electrical-Loads. 1-#10. The loads are now more evenly distributed over the three phases (Phase A . and Phase C .

Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. A warning indicates that the total connected load exceeds 80% of the defined value of 20A for the circuit you are creating. enter 25A. The Panel Schedule Report appears in a new window. 24 Select the transformer TP-2B. 17 Close the warning dialog. under Electrical . click Training Files. enter 30A. under Electrical .15 Select panel PP-2B. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_09_i. and click OK. Click OK. click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. Creating a Panel Schedule In this exercise. 16 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Power. 25 Press ESC to deselect the panel. Creating a Panel Schedule | 213 . click (Open).Loads. you create a panel schedule report for panelboard MDP-1. 20 Click OK to close the warning dialog. Panel PP-2B is now reconnected to transformer TP-2B. for Rating. 26 Close the file with or without saving it. 3 In the Select Panels dialog: ■ ■ ■ Click Clear Selection. Create the panel schedule report 1 Verify that the Level 1 Power Plan is open. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports and Schedules panel ➤ Panel Schedule. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 19 In the Instance Properties dialog for the circuit. Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties. The circuit breaker size for panel PP-2B is now sized to handle the connected load. for Rating.Loads. and click OK. 18 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties. 22 In the Instance Properties dialog for the circuit.rvt. 21 With panel PP-2B still selected. 23 With panel PP-2B still selected. Next you create a panel schedule. Select PP-2B.

10 In the Panel Report Appearance dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Header Text. The System Browser is a useful tool for checking the design and locating components in your project. Checking Your Design In this exercise you learn how to use the System Browser to examine the circuitry that you created in previous exercises. click Edit. for Appearance. 12 Close the file with or without saving it. Under Body Text. click (Open). enter 3/32.rvt. under Other. 4 Close the report. select Berlin Sans FB. expand Sheets (all). for Font. for Font Size. click Training Files. 11 Click OK twice. 6 In the Project Browser. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_10_i. Under Header Text. In the left pane of the Open dialog. select Bold and Italic. the panel will not appear in the Select Panels dialog. This dialog allows you to control how the panel schedule report displays when it is included on a sheet. for Font Size.NOTE If a panel schedule has already been created for a panel. 5 In the Project Browser. Next you use the System Browser to check your design.Panel Schedules. 8 Click Modify Schedule Graphics tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties. under Reports ➤ Panel Schedule. 214 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . drag PP-2B onto the sheet. The Panel Report Appearance dialog displays. You also learn to use the Check Circuits tool to verify that all of the circuits in your plan are connected. enter 1/8. Under Header Text. 9 In the Instance Properties dialog. and open E601 . 7 Select the schedule.

7 Move the cursor over the receptacle on the right side wall and press TAB once. 11 Select the receptacle on the right side wall. 12 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. each with a load of 180VA. 9 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. In the System Browser. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. The System Browser also provides the name and number of the space in which the devices are located. Notice that the receptacle on the right side wall is not connected to circuit 2. ■ ■ 5 In the drawing area. The System Browser provides another way of viewing information about the circuits that are connected to panel PP-2C.View unassigned components 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan is open. Note the receptacle in space Lounge 212. press TAB once. In the System Browser. 10 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Add to Circuit. and then click the receptacle to select the circuit. and click AutoFit All Columns to resize the columns in the System Browser. Expand Power ➤ PP-2C ➤ circuit 2. 4 In the System Browser: ■ Right-click a column heading. 8 Move the cursor over the receptacle on the bottom wall. There are 4 devices connected to circuit 2. 3 Move the System Browser to the bottom of the drawing area. notice that PP-2C for circuit 2 is updated. Check circuits 13 Click Analyze tab ➤ Check Systems panel ➤ Check Circuits. Checking Your Design | 215 . note that the receptacle is not connected to any circuit. Expand Unassigned. select space Lounge 212. 6 Move the cursor over the receptacle on the bottom wall and press TAB once.

20 On the Options Bar. for Panel. 17 In the drawing area. 23 Close the file with or without saving it. click (Expand warning dialog) to view details of the warning. 15 In the dialog. select MDP-1. 16 Close the details dialog. 216 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Notice that panel LP-2C is not connected. Panel LP-2C is now connected to the main distribution panel MDP-1. under Warnings. 22 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. 19 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Systems Tools panel ➤ Select Panel.14 In the warning window that is displayed indicating an unconnected power connector. 18 Select panel LP-2C. 21 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. expand the warning category for Circuit is not assigned to a panel ➤ Warning 2. zoom to space Electrical 214.

217 .Creating a Plumbing System In this tutorial. you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan and design a plumbing system.

218 .

Plumbing Plan . click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. expand Families ➤ Pipes ➤ Pipe Types. click Duplicate. right-click PVC . and specify the default fittings that will be used with this type. In this lesson.Design is open. planning is critical to a successful design. you prepare to design the plumbing system by: ■ ■ ■ ■ Creating a PVC Sanitary Pipe type. in addition to loading existing families. and click Properties.Vent.Sanitary. Specifying default sanitary piping settings for the main and branch piping.rvt. and click OK. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. 4 In the Name dialog. Loading pipe fittings required by the plumbing system. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . In this exercise. Configuring a Plumbing and Piping System Revit MEP provides families of common plumbing components that you place in your plumbing plan. and verify that Level 1 . Adding a pipe size.Planning a Plumbing System 9 Creating plumbing systems in Revit MEP is similar to any design project. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing\RME_Plumb_Planning_01_i. 219 . 2 In the Project Browser. You load the families of components that are required for your plumbing systems. type PVC . Create a pipe type 1 In the Project Browser. 3 In the Type Properties dialog. you create a PVC pipe type.Design ➤ Floor Plans.

10 On the Selection panel. click Pipe Settings. Specify sanitary piping settings 11 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ . In the Project Browser. for Pipe Connector Tolerance.PVC .DWV: Standard. Add a pipe size 20 In the left pane. for Nominal.DWV. 28 Close the file with or without saving it. 22 Click New Size.Sch 40 . NOTE For additional information on the Mechanical Settings. 8 Click Place Pipe Fitting tab ➤ Model panel ➤ Load Family.Vent is listed. under Mechanical.Sch 40 . and click Main.0''. select Tee Reducing Double Vent . click Training Files.PVC . For Offset. click Modify. 23 In the Add Pipe Size dialog. 24 For Inside Diameter. Cross. Tee. 25 For Outside. DWV represents Domestic Waste Vent. select Sanitary. 18 For System Type. enter 5/8''.Sch 40 . 15 For System Type. select Branch. The new pipe type is listed in the Project Browser under Families ➤ Pipe Fittings. under Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. select Pipe Settings ➤ Sizes. select Tee. for: ■ ■ ■ ■ Preferred Junction Type. 27 For the new pipe size. 9 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog.rfa. Load piping component families 7 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. 19 Specify the same settings for the Branch sanitary piping as you used for the Main. PVC . select Sanitary.DWV: Standard. for Material. enter 1/2''. 17 In the left pane. and click OK. select None. 14 Expand Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. 21 In the right pane.5 In the Type Properties dialog. and open Imperial\Families\Trap P . 12 In the left pane of the Mechanical Settings dialog. verify that Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing are selected. Tap. 220 | Chapter 9 Planning a Plumbing System . enter -4' . enter 10°. 6 Click OK. 13 In the right panel. under Pipe Types. select Plastic. refer to Revit MEP Online Help. select Pipe Types: PVC Sanitary.PVC . 16 Specify settings for the Main sanitary piping: ■ ■ For Pipe Type. select Tee Vent . 26 Click OK. enter 27/32''.

Create the sanitary plumbing system. Add a sanitary and vent stack to the system. including plumbing fixtures. and add piping to physically connect the fixtures to the system.Designing a Plumbing System 10 In this lesson. you design the plumbing system for the Level 1 men’s room in a commercial building. You learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Place sanitary plumbing fixtures. Create the cold water system. Create piping to connect sinks to the sanitary system. sanitary piping. add a hot water heater. vent. Create the hot water system. 221 . and hot and cold water piping. and create piping to physically connect the sinks to the hot water system.

Plumbing Plan . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. Place wall-mounted toilets 1 In the Project Browser. move the cursor over a space and refer to the tooltip or the Status Bar for information. You place 3 sinks in a later exercise. you add 2 toilets.Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures In this exercise.rvt. as shown. and a floor drain to the level 1 men’s room.Design is open.Design ➤ Floor Plans. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . click Training Files. NOTE To identify a space name and number. 1 urinal. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_01_i. 222 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 2 Zoom in to the bottom middle area of the floor plan. and verify that Level 1 . including the men’s room (space Male 107). In the left pane of the Open dialog.

1 wall-mounted urinal.6 gpf. and 3 sinks.1. Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures | 223 . in the Type Selector. 4 On the Element panel.The men's room is partitioned for 2 toilet stalls. 3 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Plumbing Fixture. select Public . 6 Click to place a toilet in the accessible toilet space.Wall Mounted. Reference lines are included in the plan view to make it easier to place components. against the left wall. as shown. 5 On the Placement panel.Flush Valve . verify that Place on Vertical Face is selected. under Water Closet . centered on the bottom horizontal reference line.

NOTE If it is difficult to align the urinal to the reference line. 224 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . and press Esc. under Urinal .7 Click to place another toilet.Wall Hung. use the reference line to center the fixture. Place a wall-mounted urinal 9 In the Type Selector. select 3/4'' Flush Valve. (Again. 10 Click to place the urinal in the space above the 2 toilet spaces. zoom in closer.) 8 Press Esc. above the first in the standard toilet space.

Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures | 225 .Place a floor drain 11 In the Type Selector. under Floor Drain . 14 Click Modify.2'' Drain. click Place on Face.Rectangular. 13 Click to place the drain above and to the right of the accessible toilet (at approximately 6'' and 6'' from the intersection of the reference lines for the 2 toilet areas). you select the floor as the face because this is a floor mounted drain. select 5''x5'' Strainer . In placing the fixture. 12 On the Placement panel.

17 If all disciplines are displayed. 19 Expand Default Sanitary. The default systems contain the fixtures that you placed. In this exercise. and notice that there are 2 default systems: Default Sanitary. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. a urinal.rvt. Creating a Sanitary System This is the first of 3 exercises that guide you through creating the piping for the men’s room sanitary plumbing system. The fixtures are included in the default system based on the connectors included with the components (sanitary connectors and cold water connectors). and notice that the drain is not included because it does not have a cold water connector. 20 Expand the Default Domestic Cold Water folder. 16 Click the title bar for the browser. and dock it by dragging it to the bottom of the drawing area. and click View ➤ Piping. and a floor drain. 18 Expand the Unassigned folder. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. 21 Close the file with or without saving it. and Default Domestic Cold Water. and review the components listed under this system.Open the System Browser 15 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_02_i. 226 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . You then use Revit MEP’s Layout Path tools to create sloped piping to connect the fixtures to a sanitary outlet. you create a sanitary system consisting of the toilets. right-click in the System Browser table heading.

clear Lines (<Overhead>). and click OK.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Plumbing. 5 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. starting in the lower left and moving to the upper right corner.Create the sanitary plumbing system 1 In the Project Browser. 7 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. and position the browser window at the bottom of the screen. verify that Plumbing Fixtures is selected.Plumbing Plan . 4 Zoom in to the plumbing fixtures in both views. 8 In the Filter dialog. open Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing .Design ➤ Floor Plans.Design is open. 2 In the Project Browser. Only plumbing fixtures are selected. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . 3 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. draw a selection box around the fixtures in the men's room. and verify that Level 1 . 6 In the plan view. Creating a Sanitary System | 227 .

All of the fixtures except for the drain also have cold water connectors. 228 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 10 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. so the Create Sanitary System is available. enter Sanitary 107. The components that were listed under the default system are now included in the Sanitary 107 system. If you deselected the drain. 11 On the Options Bar. and the empty default sanitary folder is deleted. click Finish Editing System. the Create Cold Water System option would also be available. and notice that Sanitary 107 is listed. 13 In the Systems Browser. The fixtures you selected all have sanitary connectors. You include the bathroom space number in the name.9 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Sanitary. 12 On the Edit System panel. for System Name. expand Sanitary.

for example. 15 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. and click OK. select Sanitary 107. a toilet. as shown. 17 Click Generate Layout tab ➤ Generate Layout panel ➤ Place Base. at the midpoint of the detail lines. The base creates a vertical pipe for the system to connect into and establishes a source or an outlet for flow. Creating a Sanitary System | 229 . 18 Click to select a point to the left of the accessible toilet. 16 In the Select a System dialog.Create physical connections 14 In the plan view. select one of the components in the system. The base is placed. A preview of the piping layout displays.

and click Settings. for Diameter. enter -4'-0”. 24 In the left pane. 20 On the Generate Layout panel. enter -1' 0''. 25 On the Options Bar. 21 On Options Bar.19 On the Options Bar. 27 Click Modify. 23 For Offset. and modify it to meet project requirements. 22 In the left pane of the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. The elevation is specified low enough to allow sloping of the sanitary piping in the system. select 4''. select Main. and for Offset. 230 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . The positive value slopes the pipe down toward the base point. When laying out a number of different systems with different offset requirements. You accept this suggested solution. it is helpful to be able to change the defaults as you work. enter -1' 0''. for Slope. select Branch. enter 1/8'' / 12''. for Offset. click (Next Solution) until Solution Type 2 of 7 is selected. You override the default pipe settings before applying the recommended pipe layout. for Solution Type. and click OK. click Solutions. The elevation of the base with relation to the other components in the system is critical. 26 On the Options Bar. select Intersections. The default settings are automatically modified.

Creating a Sanitary System | 231 . and move the cursor to the left to align all 4 segments to the base point. 29 Click the move parallel control (4-way arrow). select the vertical route path segments.Customize the suggested layout 28 While pressing Ctrl.

as shown. 232 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . use the ViewCube to orient the view. 31 Click Modify.30 In the 3D view. as shown. and drag the line to the left to snap perpendicular to the main. 32 Select the vertical branch line for one of the toilets.

Creating a Sanitary System | 233 .33 Using the previous method. adjust the vertical branch line for the other toilet. 34 On the Generate Layout panel. click Finish Layout.

and press Tab 4 times to check connectivity. 35 Highlight one of the plumbing fixtures. ■ ■ ■ ■ 1=Branch in a network 2=Branch in a network including the branch objects 3=Branch in a network up to a piece of equipment 4=Network (including fixtures) 36 Click to select the fitting to the drain. 234 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System .Examine the piping Complete all steps in this section in the 3D Plumbing view. and examine the sanitary tee to verify proper orientation. select the fitting and click to reorient it. When a fitting is reversed.

adding sinks in the men’s room. and manually creating the piping that connects them to the sanitary system. and check the slope control. as shown. you continue with the work from the last exercise. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System In this exercise.37 Select the pipe segment to the right of the fitting. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 235 . The slope control for every segment should indicate the slope is toward the sanitary outlet. 38 Close the file with or without saving it.

5 On the Placement panel.rvt. select 22''x22'' . 4 On the Element panel. and verify that Level 1 . 2 Zoom in to the men’s room (Space Male 107). verify that Place on Vertical Face is selected. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing .Rectangular.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. under Lavatory . click Training Files. Add sinks to the layout 1 In the Project Browser. 6 Click to place the sink centered on the top horizontal reference line.Public. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_03_i. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Design is open. as shown. in the Type Selector.Plumbing Plan . 236 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 3 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Plumbing Fixture.Design ➤ Floor Plans.

TIP When entering dimensions. On the Options Bar. 8 Select the sink. in this step you can enter 2 4 (two space four) to specify 2' 4''.7 Click Modify. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 237 . For example. Click the right endpoint of the placement reference line for the sink to establish a start point. without having to enter ' and '' symbols. 9 Make 2 copies of the sink: ■ ■ ■ Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. select Multiple. enter 2' 4''. ■ Move the cursor up above the top reference line. you can enter a space to separate the value for feet and inches. and press Enter to create a second sink.

13 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. and press Enter to create the third sink.■ ■ Enter 2' 4''. click Add To System. and position the browser window at the bottom of the screen. click Finish Editing System. expand Sanitary ➤ Sanitary 107. 14 On the Edit Piping System panel. 11 In the System Browser. 12 In the drawing area. Add sinks to the sanitary system 10 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. 238 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . Press Esc. select a component of the Sanitary 107 system. 16 On the Edit System panel. 15 Click the 3 sinks.

21 Select the tee. right-click the top connector (sanitary connector). notice that the 3 sinks (lavatories) have been added to the Sanitary 107 system. and click Draw Pipe. use the ViewCube to orient the view. and click the + control on the left to upgrade the fitting to a tee. double-click 3D Plumbing. and zoom in to the elbow fitting for the urinal. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 239 . 20 Select the fitting. 22 In the plan view. under Design ➤ Plumbing . 18 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile.Design ➤ 3D Views. Create piping to connect the sinks 17 In the Project Browser.In the System Browser. with the tee fitting selected. 19 In the 3D view. as shown.

NOTE Piping is displayed according to color filters specified in the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. In this example. 25 Move the cursor up to the centerline of the middle sink. 27 Click Modify. piping connected to the sanitary system displays in olive green. 26 On the Options Bar. enter 1/8'' / 12''. for Slope. the pipe being drawn automatically assumes the size and elevation of the fitting. 24 On the Options Bar.23 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Placement Tools panel ➤ Automatically Connect to switch off this option. press Spacebar. 240 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . and click Apply. and click to draw the pipe. enter 2' .6''. When you press the Spacebar. for Offset.

and when the vertical center line displays. 29 In the Type Selector.PVC .Sch 40 . Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 241 . 32 Select the double wye fitting.3D view shown for clarity 28 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. 30 In the 3D view. 31 Click Modify. and click the lower rotate control to align the fitting parallel to the sinks.DWV. under Wye 45 Deg Double . move the cursor over the stub pipe. select Standard. click to place the fitting.

zoom in to the double wye fitting. 34 Press Esc. for Offset. 242 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . on the Options Bar. 39 Draw the pipe as shown: ■ Draw at a 45 degree angle up and to the right. and click Draw Pipe. you add pipe segments to the double wye. and press Enter. In the next steps. 37 Select the fitting. enter 6''.33 With the fitting selected. and press Enter. double-click the section head to open the section view. 38 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Placement Tools panel ➤ Automatically Connect to switch on this option. Add pipe stubs to the double wye 35 In the plan view. right-click the right connector. enter 1'. 36 In the section view.

40 Click Modify. which automatically sets the length of the pipe to the value entered. draw similar piping for the left sink (the first segment angled at 135°). ■ Move the cursor horizontally to the right until the end of the pipe segment intersects with the centerline of the right sink. 41 Using the same method.Entering a length dimension while drawing pipes activates Revit MEP’s listening dimension tool. and click to place the pipe. as shown. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 243 . 43 Select the center vertical pipe in the double wye fitting. 42 Click Modify.

47 Move the cursor down. and press Esc. Add P-Trap Fittings 45 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile so you can see all 3 views.44 Drag the upper control until the pipe aligns with the centerline of the horizontal piping. draw a selection box around the left sink to select it. enter 6''. press Spacebar. and press Enter to create the segment of pipe. 48 Click Modify. 46 In the section view. 244 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . right-click the bottom connector. and click Draw Pipe. draw a 6'' pipe for the other 2 sinks. 49 Using the same method.

Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 245 . and click the rotate control 3 times to orient the pipe toward the double wye piping. 51 In the Type Selector. rotate the P-Trap for the other 2 sinks.Sch 40 . You adjust the orientation after placing all 3 P-Traps. place a P-Trap on the other 2 sinks. under Trap P . select the P-Trap on the left. 54 Click Modify. 52 In the plan view.DWV. 55 In the 3D view. 56 Using the same method.50 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. click to place the P-Trap at the endpoint of the stub pipe for the top sink. 53 Using the same method. select Standard.PVC . You can see in the 3D view that it is connected.

right-click the left connector on the P-Trap. enter 6''. Select the double wye pipe on the left.. Click in the plan view. and press Enter. 58 Using the same method. select the left P-Trap. Click Modify Pipe Fittings tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into.57 Finish the connection for the left sink: ■ ■ ■ In the 3D view. The piping is connected and the appropriate fittings are automatically created. connect the right sink to the double wye. Move the cursor to the left. click to select the P-Trap for the middle sink. 246 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . and click Draw Pipe. In the plan view. Click Modify. 59 Connect the middle sink using a routing solution: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the 3D view.

■ ■ ■ ■ Specify a slope 60 In the 3D view. On the Routing Solutions panel. select PVC Sanitary. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 247 . while pressing Ctrl. under Pipe Types. In the Type Selector. Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Routing Solutions. click Finish to select the recommended solution. select the section of pipe you just drew. as shown. and select a proposed solution. Press Esc. select the 3 horizontal pipes from the sinks. and select the vertical section of pipe from the wye.■ In the 3D view. Routing Solutions tools are activated that let you add control points or remove control points. while pressing Ctrl.

Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. You have appropriately sloped the pipe. click Training Files. you continue with the work on the sanitary system. 248 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 65 Close the file with or without saving it. for Slope.61 Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Slope. adjusting the sanitary stack. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_04_i. 64 Select a pipe that you just modified.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 62 On the Options Bar. verify that 1/8'' / 12'' is selected. 63 On the Slope Editor panel. and verify the slope. Refining the Sanitary Stack In this exercise. click Finish.

7 On the Selection panel. 5 Select the tee. and open the following views: ■ ■ ■ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 .Add a vertical soil stack 1 In the Project Browser. select the elbow fitting on the right.Plumbing Plan .Sch 40 . and click the intersection to place the fitting.Overall. right-click the top connector. 2 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. click Modify. Refining the Sanitary Stack | 249 . 3D Views ➤ 3D Plumbing. select Standard. and click to draw the pipe.Floor level line. under Wye Combination with 8th Bend . as shown.DWV. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 38. and click Draw Pipe.Design. select the vertical stack. Add a reducing wye to the stack 8 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting.Design. 9 In the Type Selector. 10 In the 3D view. and adjust the views as necessary to view the plumbing.PVC . 4 Click the top + control to upgrade the fitting to a tee. 6 Move the cursor up to the 02 . 3 In the Section view.

PVC . under Plug . for Offset.DWV. select Standard. enter 1'-0”.Sch 40 . 15 Press Esc. 250 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 18 In the plan view.11 Click Modify. 12 Select the fitting. and click the rotate control to change the orientation. 13 Click the rotate control once. 17 In the Type Selector. 14 On the Options Bar. as shown. click the midpoint at the end of the sanitary pipe. Add a pipe plug to cap the cleanout 16 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting.

19 Click Modify. A cleanout is required on all vertical stacks. and verify that Level 1 . The plug is added to the end to cap off the cleanout. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_05_i.Design ➤ Floor Plans.Plumbing Plan . Creating the Cold Water System In this exercise. Specify mechanical settings for the hot and cold water systems 1 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. click Training Files. you create the domestic cold water system and add piping to connect all of the fixtures in the men’s room to the system. Creating the Cold Water System | 251 .Design is open. 20 Close the file with or without saving it. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing .rvt.

urinal. select Branch. 8 Specify options for the Main cold water piping: ■ ■ For Pipe Type. Create the cold water system 11 In the Project Browser. and click Main. select Domestic Hot Water. These categories include all of the components placed earlier that have relevant connectors. 6 In the left pane.) 16 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 4 In the right pane. 13 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. 12 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 7 In the left pane. To minimize opportunities for piping interference. For Offset. for System Type. (Do not select the floor drain because it does not have a hot or cold water connector. 15 In the plan view. (Remember to specify Domestic Cold Water as the System Type. for System Type. For Offset. 9 In the left pane. minimize the Sanitary system. and for System Type. double-click 3D Plumbing . if necessary. under Design ➤ Plumbing .Overall. verify that the value is 9' 0''. select Plumbing Fixtures. click Check None. 14 In the System Browser. select Domestic Cold Water. draw a selection box to select the toilets.Design ➤ 3D Views. select Main. 5 Specify options for the Main hot water piping: ■ ■ For Pipe Type. 3 In the left pane of the Mechanical settings dialog. select Domestic Hot Water. select Pipe Types: Water. and position the browser at the bottom of the screen. enter 9' 3''. 252 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . and click OK. select Branch. and sinks. select Pipe Types: Water. and specify the same settings for the Branch Domestic Hot Water system. and notice that Default Domestic Hot Water and Default Domestic Cold Water systems are listed. expand Unassigned.) 10 Click OK. and specify the same settings for the Branch Domestic Cold Water system. expand Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion.2 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ . you specify different offset elevations for the cold water piping and the hot water piping. 17 In the Filter dialog.

click Finish Editing System. Expand Domestic Cold Water ➤ DCW 107 to verify the components. Notice that the water main displays in blue. 19 On the System Tools panel. indicating that it is now part of the cold water system. notice that the Default Domestic Cold water system is removed because all of the fixtures have been added to the DCW 107 system. Creating the Cold Water System | 253 . click Edit System. verify that Predominantly Flush Valves is selected. For Flow Conversion Method. In the System Browser. 23 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. 24 Click the horizontal water main above the toilets. 20 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For System Name. 21 On the Edit System panel.18 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Domestic Cold Water. Create piping for the cold water system 22 In the 3D view. enter DCW 107. select the toilet closest to the vertical soil stack.

34 In the plan view. 32 Move the cursor to the right. right-click the top DCW connector. for Offset. for Offset. 37 On the Options Bar. at the intersection of the water main pipe. select Water. 27 On the Placement Tools panel. enter 10'. enter 7''. enter 3' . connect the second toilet.25 Using the same method. 33 Click Modify. select the sink above the urinal. and press Enter. enter 4'0”. press Spacebar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the existing pipe. and press Enter. enter 0”/12”. 28 In the Type Selector. verify that Automatically Connect is selected. 36 Move the cursor to the left.2 7/8''. select 3/4''. and click to place the pipe. 29 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ For Diameter. as shown. and click Draw Pipe. 35 In the Type Selector. verify that Pipe Types: Water is selected. 31 On the Options Bar. 30 In the plan view. For Slope. 38 Move the cursor up to the top of the third sink. and click the connector. as shown. click to the left of the urinal. 254 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . under Pipe Types. For Offset. 26 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe.

40 Click Modify. select Connector 1 : Domestic Cold Water : Round : 1'' : In. 43 Click the branch cold water pipe. and click OK. Creating the Cold Water System | 255 . (Status Bar indicates Horizontal and [Pipes : Pipe Types : Water]). 41 Select the top sink. 42 In the Select Connector dialog. and click to connect to the main cold water line.39 Move the cursor to the left. and click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. The sink is connected to the cold water branch piping.

and add piping to connect the sinks in the menu’s room to the system.44 Using the same method. Creating the Hot Water System In this exercise. connect the middle sink to the branch pipe. 45 Close the file with or without saving it. you create the hot water system. add a water heater. 256 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System .

expand the Unassigned folder. Creating the Hot Water System | 257 . 5 In the System Browser. select the 3 sinks.Plumbing Plan . expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . 6 In the plan view.rvt. Create the hot water system 1 In the Project Browser.Overall. and position the browser at the bottom of the screen. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_06_i. 3 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. click Training Files. and verify that Level 1 .Design ➤ Floor Plans. 2 In the Project Browser.Design is open. open Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . and expand the Default Domestic Hot Water system. 4 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. Notice that the 3 sinks (lavatories) are listed.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Plumbing . while pressing Ctrl.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open.

the Domestic Hot Water 107 system is listed along with the 3 sinks (lavatories). 13 In the plan view. 17 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel.Tankless. 8 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ System Properties. 258 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . for System Name. you edit the system to add equipment. and click Edit System. 15 In the System Browser. a best practice to maximize operation is to assign all components to the appropriate system and clear the default folders. 10 In the System Browser. 14 Click Modify. (The folders are created according to the connectors available on the hot water heater. as shown. Default Domestic Hot Water. Default Other folders are created and the Water Heater is listed. 12 In the Type Selector. verify that DCW 107 is selected. click to position the water heater in the lower left corner of the utility room above the bathroom. under Water Heater . 9 In the Instance Properties dialog.7 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Domestic Hot Water. You add the water heater to the Domestic Cold Water system first. Add a water heater 11 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. enter Domestic Hot Water 107.6 Gallon. Default Domestic Cold Water.) Add the water heater to DCW 107 16 Select a sink in the men’s room. and click OK. select 0. in the Unassigned folder. When designing systems. In later steps.

Connect the water heater to the cold water supply 20 In the plan view. 27 Click Modify. enter 10’. Slope: 0''/12''. and on the Edit System panel. 24 Move the cursor up. 25 On the Options Bar. and press Enter. The tankless water heater is connected to the cold water supply. verify that Pipe Types: Water is selected. Creating the Hot Water System | 259 . enter 1' 6''. 22 In the Type Selector. select the water heater. as shown. 21 On the Placement Tools panel. specify: ■ ■ ■ Diameter: 1''. and click the water main line. and select Draw Pipe. 19 Select the water heater.18 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. right-click the middle left connector. Offset: 4' 6''. for Offset. 26 Move the cursor to the right. 23 On the Options Bar. verify that Automatically Connect is selected. click Finish Editing System.

Add the water heater to Domestic Hot Water 107 28 In the plan view. for Diameter. 37 On the Options Bar. 32 Click the tankless hot water heater. enter 1''. select 4'-6''. 260 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . enter 9' 0''. 29 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel. select a sink. select Domestic Hot Water 107. Connect the water heater to the hot water supply 34 Select the water heater. right-click the bottom connector (domestic hot water). and click just to the left of the cold water pipe. and press Enter. click Automatically Connect to switch it off. and for Offset. 33 On the Edit System panel. 38 Move the cursor to the right. 35 On the Options Bar. for Offset. click Edit System. and in the System Selector. 30 On the System Tools panel. and on the Placement Tools panel. as shown. and click Draw Pipe. 31 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Select Equipment. enter 1' 6''. 36 Move the cursor down. click Finish Editing System.

as shown. 40 On the Options Bar. Creating the Hot Water System | 261 . enter 2' 8''.39 Move the cursor down. 41 Move the cursor down. enter 1’. for Offset. and press Enter. and click just above the bottom sink. 42 Click Modify.

select the left sink (the one closest to the urinal). 45 Using the same method and the Connect Into tool. The hot water pipe is automatically connected to the sink. 262 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 44 Select the horizontal pipe that you just drew. connect the other 2 sinks to the hot water pipe.43 In the 3D view. and click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into.

rvt project and view the vent piping for the plumbing system. 47 Optional: Open the RME_Plumb_Design_07_i.46 Close the file with or without saving it. Creating the Hot Water System | 263 .

264 .

Creating a Fire Protection System In this tutorial. 265 . you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan and design a fire protection system.

266 .

NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. you will use a project file that has already been linked to an architectural model. 267 . Specifying Pipe Settings In this exercise. you can choose to save your work.Planning a Fire Protection System 11 The most common method of designing systems in Revit MEP is to work within a linked architectural building model. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. You can search this directory to verify that the training files have been downloaded. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. you will create a wet fire protection system for the second floor of an office building. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided training file.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. However. with Space components placed in the areas throughout the model.autodesk. click Training Files. and then you configure conversion settings that you will use when you create piping to physically connect the sprinklers. see Planning Mechanical Systems in the Mechanical Systems tutorial. In the left pane of the Open dialog. If the tutorial training files are not present. In this tutorial. You create a new pipe type. You will also check a Space Schedule that you can use to assess the coverage for the fire protection systems. you begin work on the project that contains a wet fire protection system. Create a pipe type 1 In the Project Browser. To learn more about linking and preparing an architectural model. In this lesson. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Planning_01_i. After finishing each exercise. The training files that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training Files ➤ Imperial directory.rvt. A copy is made of the Standard pipe type. and click Duplicate. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. go to http://www. expand Families ➤ Pipes ➤ Pipe Types. 2 Right-click Standard.

This offset elevation places the pipe branches at 9 feet above the referenced level for the views. 268 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . and click Properties. This is useful for avoiding interference with pipes. In this exercise. duct. However. For Pipe Type. select Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet. under Mechanical. You now specify the conversion settings for the pipe branches. Configure pipe conversion settings 7 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Mechanical Settings. verify that Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet is listed. 10 Close the file with or without saving it. for Material. select Fire Protection Wet. For Offset. you create a sprinkler zone project parameter. 5 In the Type Properties dialog. 8 In the Mechanical Settings dialog: ■ ■ In the left pane. In the next exercise. For System Type. 4 Right-click Fire Protection Wet. you should configure or verify the Conversion settings before you convert a layout path. click Rename. you modify the type properties of the pipe. you create project parameters and work with schedules. structural beams. select Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion ➤ Branch. In the left pane. Configuring the Conversion settings is usually a one-time process unless you need to change them during your project. NOTE Conversion settings are applied when you convert the pipe layout path to physical piping. This offset elevation places the pipe main at 9 feet above the referenced level for the views.3 Right-click the copy (Standard 2). verify that 9' 0" is selected. select Carbon Steel. and then click OK. For System Type. For Offset. verify that 9' 0" is specified. You also configured the conversion settings for both wet and dry fire protection systems. select Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet. you created a new pipe type for the wet fire protection system and modified its type properties. Level 2 is the referenced level for the views where you will be designing. and enter Fire Protection Wet. 9 Click OK. under Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. The conversion settings for the Fire Protection Wet system type display. select Fire Protection Wet. or architectural components. For Pipe Type. Determining Zone Requirements In this exercise. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ NOTE The branch offset allows you to automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. You can configure the Conversion settings at the beginning or during your project. so the pipe main will be offset from level 2. Next. You then assign spaces in the top portion of the plan to one zone and spaces in the bottom portion to another zone. 6 In the Project Browser. select Main. The new pipe type is created based on the Standard pipe type.

and click Element Properties. When you highlight a space using the cursor. enter Sprinkler Zone.rvt. for Name.Fire Protection Plan . Under Categories. and then click OK. 3 In the Project Parameters dialog. 5 Click OK twice. select Fire Protection. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Planning_02_i. 7 In the Instance Properties dialog. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Determining Zone Requirements | 269 . click Add. select space Instruction 221 as shown. 6 In the drawing area.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . For Group parameter under. right-click. under Fire Protection. You draw a crossing window from the lower left to the upper right of the area you want to enclose. select Spaces. enter Zone 1.Design is highlighted. 8 Using a crossing window. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. the space crossing lines display. select the upper half of the building. click Training Files. for Sprinkler Zone.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 4 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Data. 2 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Parameters. indicating that it’s the active view. Create project parameters 1 In the Project Browser.

Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule In this exercise. 13 Using the same method. you create schedules for sprinkler design. to which you add various parameters. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 10 In the Filter dialog. for Sprinkler Zone. for Sprinkler Zone. 12 In the Instance Properties dialog. 14 In the Instance Properties dialog. 270 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Planning_03_i.9 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. select Zone 1. 16 Close the file with or without saving it. including a calculated value parameter. 15 Press Esc to clear the selection. click Training Files. You modify the schedules and add an embedded schedule in order to use the schedule as a design tool. under Fire Protection. and then click OK. under Fire Protection. enter Zone 2. and click OK. and then access instance properties. filter the bottom half of the building to select only Spaces. verify that only Spaces are selected. 11 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. and then click OK.rvt.

and click Field Format.Fire Protection Plan . enter Maximum Spacing. for Name. 11 Click OK twice. 6 Using the same method. For Name. 3 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ Under Category. In the Maximum Spacing column. select Maximum Spacing. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . Select Schedule keys. Add schedule data 12 Select the header in the Key Name column and enter Protection Area Type as the new header. indicating that it’s the active view. enter Sprinkler Spacing and Coverage Area Schedule. double-click on each column separator. 15 In the new row: ■ ■ In the Protection Area Type column. 9 On the Formatting tab. 8 In the Schedule Properties dialog. For Rounding. enter Protection Area Construction Type. 13 To resize the column widths in the schedule. create a parameter named Maximum Coverage Area that is an Area type and is grouped under Fire Protection. Click OK. select Length. enter Light. Notice that the schedule name and the phase are automatically added. Click OK. For Units. For Type of Parameter. 5 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter data.Design is highlighted. select Feet and fractional inches. select Spaces. 14 Select the new header. enter 15. select To the nearest 1'.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . and on the ribbon. For Group parameter under. 10 In the Format dialog. Obstructed-Combustible. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Clear Use project settings. For Key name. click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ Rows: New. select Fire Protection. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 271 . 7 Click OK. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Schedule/Quantities. click Add Parameter. ■ ■ ■ ■ Create a schedule parameter 4 In the Schedule Properties dialog.Create a key schedule 1 In the Project Browser. click the Formatting tab. The schedule displays.

select Spaces. enter Sprinkler Schedule. Obstructed-Combustible Ordinary. add more schedule data: Protection Area Type Light. 16 Using the same method. Specify fields and create a calculated value parameter ■ In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ On the Fields tab. and press Enter. based on the parameter settings you specified previously. Click OK.■ In the Maximum Coverage Area column. under Available fields. For Name. Obstructed-Combustible Extra. Unobstructed Ordinary. Obstructed-Noncombustible Light. Obstructed-Noncombustible Ordinary. Unobstructed Extra. Obstructed-Noncombustible Extra. double-click in the order listed: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Number Name Sprinkler Zone Level Area Protection Area Construction Type 272 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . Unobstructed Maximum Spacing 15' Maximum Coverage Area 200 SF 15' 12' 12' 12' 15' 15' 200 SF 90 SF 90 SF 90 SF 130 SF 130 SF 15' 130 SF Create a sprinkler schedule 17 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Schedule/Quantities. 18 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Category. enter 130. NOTE The units of measure display automatically.

select Area. Organize schedule data 23 Right-click in the schedule. 20 On the Formatting tab.■ ■ ■ ■ Maximum Coverage Area Maximum Spacing Click Calculated Value. The resulting formula is Area/Maximum Coverage Area. select Fixed. select Level. select Sprinkler Zone. click . select Common. For Formula. and then use the method learned previously to select Maximum Coverage Area from the Fields dialog. For Discipline. for Sorting/Grouping. Click OK. For Then by. Select Header and Blank line. enter Minimum Sprinklers. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. This calculated value parameter allows you to immediately determine what spaces meet the sprinkler design requirements. 21 In the Format dialog: ■ ■ ■ Clear Use default settings. For Rounding. 25 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ On the Sorting/Grouping tab. and click View Properties. select 0 decimal place. and click Field Format. For Units. click Edit. 22 Click OK twice. The Minimum Sprinklers calculated value is added to the scheduled fields (at the bottom of the list). For Type. select Minimum Sprinklers. Enter the formula operator / after Area. The Sprinkler Schedule displays. In the Calculated Value dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. In the Fields dialog. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 273 . 19 Click the Formatting tab. and click OK. for Sort by. select Number. under Other.

for Filter. select Level. and select Totals only. select Number. 274 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . and then click Field Format. At the bottom of the dialog. 29 In the Schedule Properties dialog. and click View Properties. and then select Hidden field. select Minimum Sprinklers.■ ■ ■ ■ Select Header and Blank line. select Grand totals. select Sprinkler Zone. verify that Use default settings is selected. On the Formatting tab: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Fields. click Edit. ■ In the Format dialog. right-click the schedule. For Fields. Under Field formatting. 28 In the Instance Properties dialog. For Fields. select Level equals Level 2. The schedule is arranged and sorted as specified. for Filter by. 27 In the drawing area. For Then by (second instance). select Hidden field. 30 Click OK twice. 26 Click OK 3 times.

System Name. select Grand totals. use click and drag to select the last 4 schedule column headers. delete the word Maximum. for Available fields. under Other. select Calculate totals. On the Formatting tab. and Count. select Sprinklers. double-click Type. 32 Click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ Headers: Group. Create an embedded schedule 35 Right-click the schedule. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 275 . select Embedded Schedule. ■ ■ ■ 38 Click OK 3 times.The schedule is filtered to show only zones on level 2. and then click Embedded Schedule Properties. 33 Click in the grouped header cell. and enter Maximum Sprinkler Spacing and Area Coverage. 36 In the Instance Properties dialog. For Category. On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. for Fields. Group schedule columns 31 In the drawing area. select Count. for Embedded Schedule. 37 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ On the Embedded Schedule tab. 34 In the Maximum Coverage Area column and in the Maximum Spacing column. click Edit. and select Totals only. and click View Properties. Under Field formatting. On the Sorting/Grouping tab.

43 Click Cancel. and access the instance properties. but their values are not determined. Unobstructed.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . under Identity Data. This digital database information source is the central concept of Building Information Modeling (BIM). When you change editable entries in the schedule to modify your system. The parameter change is evident in the schedule. select Light. As a result. 49 Filter the selection for spaces only. for Protection Area Construction Type. 52 Click OK. 41 In the plan view. select Ordinary. 42 In the Instance Properties dialog. 40 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile to tile the floor plan and the Sprinkler Schedule. Notice that the selection you made in the schedule displays in the dialog. 50 Access the instance properties. 276 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . select Ordinary. Unobstructed. select space 221 Instruction. 47 In the Instance Properties dialog. for Protection Area Construction Type. each change is dynamic and immediately propagates throughout your project. under Identity Data. Notice also that the Maximum Spacing and Maximum Coverage Area parameters that you created are listed under Fire Protection. and click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.Fire Protection Plan Design. 45 For Protection Area Construction Type. and the spacing parameter values are evident. you are actually editing information in a database of building information. select space 221 Instruction. notice that there is nothing specified for Protection Area Construction Type. under Identity Data. 51 In the Instance Properties dialog. 44 In the schedule. use a selection box to select the upper half of the building. IMPORTANT A schedule in Revit MEP is not only a construction document but also a design tool. Unobstructed. double-click FP . and click OK.Modify space properties from the schedule 39 In the Project Browser. 48 In the floor plan. 46 With the space still selected. click in the floor plan to make it the active view.

Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 277 .53 Close the file with or without saving it.

278 .

you will learn various methods to quickly and precisely place sprinklers into the ceiling plan. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . However. you place host-based sprinklers in a ceiling plan view. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_01_i.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. click Training Files. You will use the sprinkler schedule that you created in a previous exercise as a design guide for sprinkler placement. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. you learn the best practices for designing systems with Revit MEP. go to http://www. In the left pane of the Open dialog. If the tutorial training files are not present.autodesk. and specific techniques for designing fire protection systems in Revit MEP. you will understand the process.Designing a Fire Protection System 12 In this tutorial. The training files that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training Files ➤ Imperial directory. 279 .rvt. you can choose to save your work. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. you create a wet fire protection system using a linked architectural model of a building project. you follow a series of exercises that teach the recommended systems design workflow for Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. hosted to the linked architectural ceiling family. You can search this directory to verify that the training files have been downloaded. As you create the system. Adding Sprinklers In this exercise. The goal of this tutorial is to teach you to create a fire protection system using Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. After finishing each exercise. and double-click Level 2 . Place host-based sprinklers 1 In the Project Browser.FP_Ceiling to make it the active view. At the end of this tutorial. By following the recommended workflow. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided training file. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. As you place the sprinklers. methodology.Design ➤ Ceiling Plans.

2 Zoom in to the spaces in the lower right corner of the building. you copy and array sprinklers referencing the intersection of ceiling grids. When this happens. 280 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . This action aligns sprinklers so that the piping layout is more efficient. 3 In the Project Browser. When there is a small misalignment. 4 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. After placing the initial sprinkler. and arrange the views so that they are tiled horizontally. Sprinklers should either be aligned to each other or sufficiently separated to allow space for fittings. IMPORTANT The alignment of sprinklers is critical and will affect the conversion of a layout path to physical piping in later exercises. the layout path feature will attempt to create separate piping paths to the sprinklers. open Schedules/Quantities ➤ Sprinkler Schedule. 6 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Sprinkler. there is insufficient space between the 2 branches to place fittings and the conversion will fail. 5 Click in the ceiling plan to make it the active view.

Continue placing sprinklers You copy the existing sprinklers to place other sprinklers in spaces 203 and 204. Adding Sprinklers | 281 . as shown.Pendent . because it calculates the number of sprinklers needed for each space and the maximum distance between sprinklers. You can use the Minimum Sprinklers column in the schedule as guidance when you design the fire protection system. select the sprinklers that you placed. 11 In the drawing area. 8 Click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Place on Face to place the sprinkler on the ceiling tile face. 10 Press Esc twice. and select Sprinkler .Semi-Recessed Hosted : 1/2" Pendent from the Type Selector drop-down.7 Click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Element panel. because the schedule indicates that each of those spaces requires a minimum of 3 sprinklers. place the cursor over the approximate center of the ceiling tiles. while pressing Ctrl. Notice that the sprinkler schedule updates to show the sprinklers you added in space 202. and click to place 3 sprinklers. 9 In space Instruction 202.

15 Select points in the 2 spaces to the left. and then press Esc. 282 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . you place non-hosted sprinklers.12 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 14 Select the upper left corner near the copy selection as the copy start point. and that Copy and Multiple are selected. Notice that a border displays to indicate the copy selection. 13 On the Options Bar. the cursor changes to indicate that the Copy tool is active. Copies of the sprinklers are placed after you specify the end point. Also. Next. as shown. verify that Constrain is cleared.

enter 10' 6". Next. zoom in to the entire wing in the lower right of the building. enter 14' 6". 16 Close the ceiling plan view.Place non-hosted sprinklers In this section. it’s added to the space at an offset of 0' 0".Fire Protection Plan . by adding the minimum number of sprinklers for the 3 corridor spaces combined. it must be positioned above the piping to which it will be connected. and click Element Properties. 20 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Sprinkler. and then click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. Array sprinklers 26 With the sprinkler still selected. 23 Right-click the sprinkler. Because the sprinkler is not hosted. move the cursor to the right. and then tile the floor plan and schedule views horizontally. 17 In the Project Browser. 200B. click to place a sprinkler at the beginning of the corridor as shown. 21 Click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Element panel. 28 Click the center of the existing sprinkler as the start point. enter 11. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. and select Sprinkler-Upright : 1/2" Upright from the Type Selector drop-down. you place non-hosted sprinklers. and array the sprinklers in the 3 spaces that comprise the Corridor (200A.Design. you adjust the offset. For Number. and press Enter. indicating that the design requirements for the corridor spaces have been met. specify a vertical offset.FP_Ceiling view. This number is determined in the schedule. 18 Type WT. open Design ➤ FP . Adding Sprinklers | 283 . 27 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Clear Group And Associate. click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Array. 25 Click OK. You place the system components based on the design requirements (sprinkler count and spacing) indicated in the schedule. Because this is an upright sprinkler with its connector facing down. This specifies an elevation for the sprinkler that makes it visible in the Level 2 . Notice that the schedule updates. 29 Press Esc. and 200C).Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . for Offset. under Constraints. 19 In the floor plan. 22 In the 200A Corridor space.

284 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . you placed 2 types of sprinklers using various placement methods. and with piping (physical connection). In this exercise. you connect the sprinklers by creating a system (logical connection).Fire Protection Plan . In the left pane of the Open dialog. IMPORTANT All system components are logically connected either by a system that you create or by a default system. piping is necessary to perform calculations that reference the physical pipe geometry such as sizing. This is the recommended workflow or best practice for systems creation in Revit MEP. A system is the logical connection between system components such as sprinklers.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . After creating the logical connection.30 Close the file with or without saving it. Then you simplify the layout using Modify tools from the Generate Layout tab on the ribbon to modify pipe branches prior to converting the layout to piping. click Training Files. and then creating the logical connection between these system components. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_02_i. physical connections (piping) are not required for systems designing. Creating a Piping System In this exercise.rvt. indicating that it’s the active view. However. you use the Layout Path tools to create the initial layout for the piping. You create fire protection systems by placing sprinklers. 1 In the Project Browser. you create a wet sprinkler system and add piping to connect the sprinklers that you placed. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. In the next exercise. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses including flow and pressure.Design is highlighted. Unlike logical connections (systems).

as shown. named Fire Protection Wet. Creating a Piping System | 285 . The wet system that logically connects the sprinklers displays in red to indicate that the new system is selected. 8 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Fire Protection Wet to create a fire protection wet system. within the Piping Systems folder. It does not indicate a pipe layout path. and assign the selected sprinklers to it. and select Piping. This occurs because each system component must be assigned to a system after it is placed in order to perform calculations such as flow. In the System Browser. 5 Right-click the header. all of the selected sprinklers have been moved from the Default Fire Protection Wet folder to the new system folder. Connect sprinklers with a system 7 Draw a selection box (from left to right) around the sprinklers in the office spaces. IMPORTANT System components that you place are initially located under a default system category in the Unassigned folder. The Fire Protection Wet system is created and listed in the System Browser.2 Zoom in to the wing at the lower right of the building. As you assign sprinklers to systems. Explore the System Browser 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. they are moved from the Unassigned folder to their respective assigned system folder. 6 Expand the Unassigned ➤ Default Fire Protection Wet 1 system to view the level 2 sprinklers that you placed in the building. 4 Drag the System Browser so that it docks at the bottom of the drawing area. Keep the System Browser open and refer to it as you create systems. click View ➤ Systems.

you use the System Browser to confirm and validate the system. 18 In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. 14 Click Finish Editing System. The Generate Layout tools are activated. TIP If you click in the drawing area and the red system display clears. Notice that the Options Bar allows you to verify or modify the system name. and number of elements in the system. 15 In the drawing area. 17 Click Generate Layout tab ➤ Generate Layout panel ➤ Solutions. verify that Pipe Types: Fire Protection . For Pipe Type. 286 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . press Tab. providing system editing tools. system equipment. 10 Right-click Fire Protection Wet 1. and a piping layout preview displays. You can now view the fire protection system hierarchy: the Fire Protection Wet 1 system logically connects the sprinklers. 13 In the System Browser. enter FP Wet_Zone2. Revit MEP uses these settings to convert the preview layout path to physical piping. you create piping to physically connect the sprinklers. place the cursor over a sprinkler. select Branch. for System Name. Create the initial layout The Layout Paths tools let you specify a source for the system. click Settings. In the left pane. and click Select. For Offset. Verify that the above pipe type and offset settings are the same for Branch.Wet is selected. ■ ■ NOTE The branch offset allows you to automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. verify that Main is selected. click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. indicating the logical connection. 12 On the Options Bar. verify that 9' 0" is specified. select an initial piping layout. 19 Click OK. double-click the Fire Protection Wet 1 system listing to view the list of sprinklers.Now that the sprinklers are logically connected. 16 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. select a sprinkler that belongs to FP Wet_Zone2. The Edit Piping System panel displays. Confirm and validate the system 9 In the System Browser. and make preliminary modifications to simplify the piping layout. 11 With the system still selected. and select the system. This offset elevation places the pipe main at 9 feet above level 2. NOTE The Generate Layout feature is available whenever a system component is selected. You also verify the pipe conversion settings that you configured earlier in this tutorial. and on the Options Bar. Next. The selected fire protection wet system highlights in red. expand Fire Protection Wet ➤ FP Wet_Zone2 to see the included sprinklers.

click Place Base. Modify the layout 26 You use the Modify tool to customize and simplify the layout. and select solution 5. The base component provides a source for the fire protection system. 24 On the Generate Layout panel. enter -12' 0". 25 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Solution Type. the method for moving segments in a layout depends on the type of connection between a branch and the main piping: ■ Use (parallel movement control) to move the branch when an displays at the junction. as shown. and green represents branch lines). The main piping preview connects to the base component in the stairwell. click Solutions. (elbow control) Creating a Piping System | 287 . select 2". 21 Click in the upper right corner of the stairwell to place the base component. The layout path solution displays (blue represents the main piping run. Use the arrow keys to view all the solutions. verify that Network is selected. 23 For Offset. these settings will convert the base component to a 2" riser that extends from the bottom of Level 1 up to the connection with the level 2 sprinklers (9' 0"). 22 On the Options Bar. In general.20 On the Generate Layout panel. When the layout is finished. for Diameter.

A (parallel movement control) displays. 28 Drag the parallel movement control up to a point between the office/corridor walls and the corridor sprinklers. and then drag the (elbow junction control) to merge the piping preview. On the Generate Layout panel. This pipe run physically connects the wet system sprinklers for the 3 offices on level 2.■ Move each end separately when either a (tee junction control) or (cross junction control) displays at the junction. 27 Select the horizontal layout path segment connecting to the base point. 288 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . The pipe run geometry (main and branches) is created. click Modify. All of the fittings required to connect the pipes to the system components are automatically generated. as shown. 29 Click Finish Layout. First drag the tee or cross junction control to the desired location.

select a different layout solution. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System | 289 . 33 Close the file with or without saving it. The most common causes of these errors are that there is insufficient space to create a pipe or a fitting. you complete the level 2 wet fire protection system.IMPORTANT Errors may occur when you attempt to create pipe geometry during layout path conversion or pipe sizing. View the system in 3D 30 Open FP .Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Fire Protection. and various manual pipe creation tools. 32 If necessary. or that offset elevations are incorrect. or manually modify the pipe. the Connect Into tool. and then you create piping to physically connect them. Either relocate the system components. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System In this exercise. click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Thin Lines. you complete the wet system by adding the remaining sprinklers to the FP Wet_Zone2 system using the Layout Path tool. Next. You add the remaining sprinklers to the current wet system to logically connect them. 31 Zoom in to the area with the sprinkler system.

1 In the Project Browser. click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Thin Lines. click Training Files. 2 Zoom in. 3 If necessary.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . 4 Click the left plus sign to upgrade the fitting to a tee. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and select the elbow fitting as shown. indicating that it’s the active view. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_03_i.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.rvt.Design is highlighted. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . 290 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System .Fire Protection Plan .

and pipe or duct is created. Add remaining sprinklers to FP Wet_Zone2 system 15 In the drawing area. IMPORTANT After system components (sprinklers. 11 On the Generate Layout panel. 7 On the Edit Piping System panel. System tools display on the Piping Systems tab. 6 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System so that you can add sprinklers to the system. or a system component to display system tools. air terminals. radiators. 14 Close the System Browser. 10 Select a sprinkler in the corridor. and click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. 12 On the Options Bar. and select solution 5. This allows you to modify the system (logical connection).The tee provides an open connector that will serve as a base when laying out the piping for the sprinklers in the corridor. draw a selection box from lower left to upper right around the sprinklers as shown (don’t include the last 3 sprinklers). 9 On the Edit System panel. 18 Click Finish Editing System. select a sprinkler that is part of the FP Wet_Zone2 system. 16 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. and so on) are logically connected by a system. select any sprinkler that is part of the FP Wet_Zone2 system. you can select the pipe or duct. You can confirm the sprinkler system assignment in the floor plan view or in the System Browser. Connect the sprinklers with pipe 19 Zoom to the 3 spaces at the right end of the corridor. for Solution Type. verify that Solutions is selected. The layout automatically creates a path connecting to the tee created earlier. 5 In the drawing area. click Finish Editing System. mechanical equipment. 17 Use a selection box to select the remaining 3 sprinklers. verify that Network is selected. 8 In the corridor. The selected sprinklers are assigned to FP Wet_Zone2. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System | 291 . 13 Click Finish Layout. Notice that the number of system elements updates on the Options Bar. click Add To System.

25 Select the sprinkler. 22 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into.Wet from the Type Selector drop-down. for Offset. pan and zoom to the next unconnected sprinkler. click the intersection with the horizontal main pipe as the pipe endpoint. draw pipe from the last unconnected sprinkler to the main pipe. 292 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . 21 In the Piping Plan. 28 In the drawing area. zoom in to the corridor above the spaces that have piping. and select Pipe Types: Fire Protection . select 9'.20 Open Design ➤ FP .Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Fire Protection. right-click. and then press Esc. 29 Using the same method. 23 View the result in the 3D view. Notice that horizontal and vertical segments of pipe were added. 27 On the Options Bar. and select the horizontal segment of main piping as shown. and select the leftmost unconnected sprinkler. and then tile the views. and click Draw Pipe. 26 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Element panel. 24 In the Piping Plan.

and press Tab twice to highlight the entire system. 33 Close the file with or without saving it. 32 Use the cursor to highlight a section of the pipe. 31 In the plan view. Because the whole system highlights. it’s a visual indication that all components are connected correctly. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System | 293 . zoom so that you can see the entire wing with the fire protection system.Layout in 2D Layout in 3D Verify connectivity 30 Close the 3D view.

verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . 3 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Section. click outside the corridor wall at the stairs to specify the section line start point. indicating that it’s the active view.Design is highlighted. you create a section view that you will use to work with vertical piping.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . 4 On the Options Bar.Adding Vertical Supply Piping In this exercise. Specify section properties 7 In the drawing area. You also place a hose reel cabinet in the building and connect it to the supply standpipe. 294 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . Click at the staircase to specify the section line endpoint. 2 Zoom to the offices in the lower right corner. double-click on the section head to open the section view. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_04_i. for Scale. click Training Files. Create a section view 1 In the Project Browser.Fire Protection Plan . ■ 6 Press Esc. 5 Draw the section: ■ In the drawing area. In the left pane of the Open dialog. select 1/4" = 1'-0".rvt. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.

8 Right-click, and click View Properties. 9 In the Instance Properties dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Under Graphics, for Sub-Discipline, select FP - Design. For View Classification, select Design. Under Identity Data, for View Name, enter FP Section_Stair. For Default View Template, select MEP Section. Click OK.

10 In the Project Browser, right-click Design ➤ FP - Design ➤ Sections ➤ FP Section_Stair, and click Apply Default View Template. 11 Zoom to the top near the horizontal pipe. 12 If necessary, drag the top section boundary line up. 13 Select the elbow fitting, and then click the top + grip to upgrade the elbow fitting to a tee. 14 Select the tee fitting, and then right-click the top connector, and click Draw Pipe. 15 Press Spacebar. 16 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Element panel, and select Pipe Types: Fire Protection - Wet from the Type Selector drop-down. 17 Move the cursor up, enter 7', and press Enter.

Adding Vertical Supply Piping | 295

18 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 19 Make Level 2 - Fire Protection Plan - Design the active view. Add mechanical equipment 20 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. 21 Click Place Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel, and select M_Hose Reel Cabinet Surface Mounted : 1"25mm from the drop-down list. 22 In the drawing area, click on the wall (host face) near the stairs to place the cabinet as shown, and then click Modify.

23 In the section view, zoom to the hose reel cabinet. 24 Select the cabinet, right-click the connector on the left of the cabinet, and click Draw Pipe.

296 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System

25 Verify that Fire Protection - Wet is selected from the Type Selector drop-down. 26 On the Options Bar, for Diameter, select 2"50mm. 27 On the Placement Tools panel, verify that Automatically Connect is active. 28 Connect to the vertical pipe (using the Intersection and Horizontal snaps), and then click Modify.

29 Close the section view. Add a valve 30 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Accessory. 31 In the alert dialog, click Yes to load a family. 32 In the Open dialog, navigate to Training\Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\Gate Valve - 2-12 Inch.rfa, and click Open. 33 In the Type Selector, verify that Gate Valve - 2" is selected. 34 Select the midpoint of the horizontal pipe that extends from the cabinet, as shown, and then click Modify.

Adding Vertical Supply Piping | 297

A 2" gate valve is placed in the 2" diameter pipe.

35 Open 3D Fire Protection, and zoom in to the cabinet to see the valve in 3D.

36 Close the file with or without saving it.

298 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System

Modifying Pipe Diameters
In this exercise, you modify the diameter of the pipes so that the pipes are a better fit with the design specifications. Because the pipe diameters depend on the number of sprinklers, you also create a sprinkler schedule to report the number of level 2 sprinklers. Training File
■ ■

Click

➤ Open ➤ Project.

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_05_i.rvt.

Tile the views 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP - Design ➤ 3D Views, and double-click 3D Fire Protection to make it the active view. 2 Enter WT to tile the 3D and floor plan views, and arrange them so that they’re tiled horizontally. 3 Adjust the view in both windows to view the entire fire protection pipe run as shown. You will work primarily in the floor plan view and validate the pipe geometry in the 3D view.

NOTE It is important to recognize the distinction between sizing and manually changing the diameter, height, or width. Changing the diameter, width, or height of pipe on the Options Bar is not considered sizing in Revit MEP. Sizing is performed using the Sizing tool (Sizing dialog) to size the pipe based on a series of parameters and calculations. The calculated size of a pipe is the result of the Sizing tool and not the result of a manual change of diameter, width, or height. Modify the diameter of the fire protection pipe run The majority of the pipe segments service no more than 2 sprinklers, and because the design specifications require a 1 inch diameter for pipes servicing 2 sprinklers, it’s more efficient to specify 1 inch diameter for all pipe runs, and then adjust branches servicing more than 2 sprinklers separately. 4 In the floor plan view, starting at the lower left corner of the wing, draw a selection box around the level 2 fire protection piping until just past the section line (don’t include the supply pipe or hose reel cabinet).

Modifying Pipe Diameters | 299

5 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 6 In the Filter dialog, click Check None, select Pipe Fittings and Pipes, and click OK. 7 On the Options Bar, for Diameter, select 1". 8 Click Modify. All selected piping is now 1" diameter.

Tag the pipes 9 In the floor plan view, zoom in to the right half of the wing (including the stairs). 10 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 11 Click to select a segment of pipe in the corridor. 12 If necessary, click Yes to load tags in the alert dialog, . 13 Navigate to Training\Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\Pipe Size Tag.rfa, and click Open. 14 On the Options Bar:
■ ■

Verify that Horizontal is selected. Clear Leader.

15 Place the cursor over the pipe segments shown, and after each segment highlights, click to place the tag. The tags accurately display the size of the selected pipe segments.

NOTE Tags are view specific. They display only in the view in which they were placed. Press Esc.

300 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System

Modify the diameter of the main 16 In the 3D view, select the linked architectural file. 17 On the View Control Bar, click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Category. By hiding the linked file, you isolate the piping to make it easier to select. 18 In the 3D view, select the vertical pipe below the hose cabinet.

19 Place the cursor over the section of main pipe feeding the last sprinkler, and when the section highlights, press Tab. This highlights the piping between the vertical pipe and the last segement. 20 Click to select the main piping between these points. The main piping is selected and displays in red.

Modifying Pipe Diameters | 301

The diameter of the fire protection main piping changes. select 4".21 On the Options Bar. 302 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . for Diameter.

for Diameter. change the diameter of the other top segments to 1 1/4" to accommodate sprinklers. 24 In the drawing area. The pipe diameter is modified. and maximize the floor plan. Modify the diameter of branch pipes The number of sprinklers serviced by a branch determines the pipe size used for that branch. select 1 1/4". select the top segment of branch pipe in space Instruction 202 (next to the stairs). 25 On the Options Bar.22 Click in the floor plan to make it the active view. and then tag the piping as shown. 23 Close the 3D view. Modifying Pipe Diameters | 303 . 26 Using the same method. as shown.

27 This completes the Fire Protection tutorial. you used various selection methods to modify the level 2 fire protection pipe run diameters. use the methods that you learned and create the level 1 fire protection wet system. For additional practice. and the difference between how the software sizes pipe and how to manually modify pipe diameter. In this tutorial. The completed fire protection system is included in the RME_FP_Design_06_i. Explore different system designs and discover the power of Revit MEP. You added tags to pipes. You learned how to manually change the diameter of a pipe. The pipe run now complies with the design criteria. you created a wet fire protection system. 28 Close the file with or without saving it. You also learned the difference between creating rigid physical pipe connections and creating logical systems. Use the same system components and parameters as you did for level 2. allowing you to immediately verify the pipe diameters. Feel free to modify the systems or create entirely new fire protection systems. In this exercise. 304 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System .rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ 05_Fire Protection Systems folder under Training Files.

add annotations and dimensions. 305 . and create schedules for construction documentation for a project. create details.Documenting a Project In this tutorial. you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to create views.

306 .

you duplicate an existing floor plan view to create a duct plan view. dependent views. click Training Files.rvt. You then change the properties of the new view by applying a view template. enter Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. In the left pane of the Open dialog. callout views for a typical HVAC view and a detail view. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_01_i. If the view included detail graphics. Duplicating Plan Views In this exercise. you’d select Duplicate with Detailing. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. matchlines. and click Rename. under Floor Plans. 2 In the Project Browser. and click OK. You learn to create: ■ ■ ■ ■ a duplicate plan view.Creating Documentation Views 13 In this lesson.Design ➤ Floor Plans. right-click Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. 307 . and apply a view template. You select Duplicate because only model elements are included in the original view. right-click Level 1. 3 In the Rename View dialog. Apply a view template 4 In the Project Browser. Duplicate the Level 1 floor plan to create a Level 1 duct plan 1 In the Project Browser. right-click Copy of Level 1. and click Properties. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . you begin the construction documentation for the building project. a plumbing isometric riser from a 3D design view. and view references.

and the floor plan is moved to its new location in the Project Browser hierarchy. and click Apply Default View Template. 5 Make sure Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan is the active view. You crop a dependent view to show only the area marked by the matchline. as shown. 6 In the Project Browser. select HVAC Duct Plan-Documentation. and click Rename. right-click Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. click to specify the first point of the matchline to the left of the plan and below gridline C. click Training Files. Duplicate a view to create dependent views 1 In the Project Browser. 2 Right-click the dependent view title. 11 Click beyond the exterior wall of the wing to specify the second point. and click OK. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_02_i. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. Create matchlines Matchlines are used with dependent views. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Dependent views keep the primary/parent view as the working drawing and allow you to create smaller. 6 Click View tab ➤ Sheet Composition panel ➤ Matchline. verify that the top and bottom constraints are Unlimited. 10 In the drawing area.5 In the Instance Properties dialog. The view is automatically updated with the defined graphical style. under Identity Data ➤ Default View Template. and click OK. The smaller (dependent) views inherit view properties and view-specific elements from the primary view. 7 Click Create Matchline Sketch tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Matchline Properties. This is useful when breaking up plans with varying geometries across levels. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog. create dependent views for areas B and C. to delineate splits in a large floor plan. more focused. you use dependent views to accommodate such large buildings. right-click Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. 4 Using the same method. 9 Click OK. views and put them on the sheet. and then press Esc. You can modify the visibility of matchlines in specific views.rvt. enter Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_A. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Creating Dependent Views Because large buildings cannot fit on a single sheet at 1/8" = 1' scale. 308 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . 3 In the Rename View dialog.

For Line Weight. 21 Using the same method. select black. 19 In the drawing area. click above and below the modified matchline to create view references (displayed as . select Double Dash 5/8". For Line Pattern. 14 Click Finish Matchline. 13 Press Esc twice. on the Options Bar. click the current value. select 11. for Target view. 17 On the Annotation Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog. In the Color dialog. 16 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Object Styles. select Matchline: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Line Color./ ---). Click OK. and click OK.12 Draw a second matchline that spans the floor plan above gridline H. apply Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_B to the other view reference. 20 Select the upper view reference and. and then press Esc. select Floor Plan: Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_A. Creating Dependent Views | 309 . Creating view references 18 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ View Reference. Modify object styles 15 Zoom in to the left part of the upper matchline.

as shown. 23 Open Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_A. 24 Use the grips on the crop lines to modify the view boundaries. and zoom to each of the view references. 28 Make Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan the active view. 25 Using the same method. and apply Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_C to it. 27 Using the same method. and drag Plan_A from the Project Browser onto the sheet. indicating the detail and sheet number of each view.22 Add a view reference below the lower matchline. 310 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . crop the dependent views for plans B and C. Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_B Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_C 26 Open Sheet M201. The view references in the primary view are automatically updated as the views are placed on sheets. drag Plan_B onto Sheet M202 and Plan_C onto Sheet M203.

right-click Copy of 3D Plumbing. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing-Design ➤ 3D Views. 6 In the Project Browser.Domestic Water. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Duplicate a view and specify properties 1 In the Project Browser. 8 Highlight a segment of the top horizontal piping. click Training Files. right-click 3D Plumbing. Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser | 311 .Domestic Water. right-click Plumbing Isometric . You pin the view to keep it from being moved inadvertently. 5 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. select Documentation. 7 Zoom in to the plumbing system. and click to select it.29 Close the file with or without saving it. 2 Zoom in. Click OK. for View Name. 3 Click Modify Section Boxes tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Pin. 4 In the Project Browser. and click Apply Default View Template. enter Plumbing Isometric . press Tab twice to highlight the pipe run.rvt. For Sub-Discipline. and click Properties. for View Classification. select Plumbing. you copy a 3D design view and modify it to create a 3D plumbing isometric riser for domestic water. Under Graphics. and select the section box. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_03_i. select Plumbing Isometric. Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser In this exercise. The section crop lines no longer display. For Default View Template.

Click Apply. and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Element. 10 In the View-Specific Element Graphics dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Weight. 12 Using the same method. and then click OK. select 3. change the line weight to 4 and the line pattern to Dash Dot 3/16". 11 Select the vertical segment of pipe coming off the tankless water heater. and click to select it. The selected piping displays as a dashed line. press Tab 3 times.9 Right-click. 312 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . For Pattern. select Dash.

This hides the sanitary piping in order to create a domestic water supply riser isometric view. and click to select it.13 Highlight a segment of horizontal pipe below the sinks. Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser | 313 . press Tab 3 times (until the entire pipe network highlights. as shown). and click Hide in View ➤ Elements. 14 Right-click.

and then click in empty space in the drawing to end the label. 17 Label the fixtures as shown. 16 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. On the View Control Bar. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. and rename the new view Plumbing Isometric . Click in the drawing area to start a text label.Sanitary Waste. In the drawing area. click Reveal Hidden Elements. press Tab 3 times. Unhide the sanitary waste piping: ■ ■ ■ ■ On the View Control Bar. and click Unhide in view ➤ Elements. ■ ■ ■ Hide domestic cold water and domestic hot water piping. highlight a segment of the sanitary piping.Domestic Water view with detailing. click Close Reveal Hidden Elements. create a sanitary riser isometric view: ■ Duplicate the Plumbing Isometric . 314 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views .15 Press Esc. and click to select it. On the View Control Bar. 18 Using methods learned previously. Right-click.

click on the Format value.Add a spot slope annotation 19 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Units. 21 Click OK twice. Creating Callout Views | 315 . 23 Click on the horizontal pipe below the sinks to select it. the callout head on the original view is updated with the sheet information. When the view is associated with a sheet. 20 In the Project Units dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Discipline. and click to place the spot slope annotation. select To the nearest 1/8". 26 Close the file with or without saving it. verify that Common is selected. as shown. 24 Move the cursor above the pipe. and then place the callout view on a sheet. 22 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimension panel ➤ Spot Slope. In the Format dialog. you use a plan view to create a callout view. for Rounding. For Slope. Creating Callout Views In this exercise. 25 Press Esc twice.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. beginning at the upper left and ending at the lower right. 4 Click Callout tab ➤ Element panel. Create a floor plan callout 1 In the Project Browser. 2 Zoom in to an office in Area C (the bottom section of the plan). click Training Files.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 7 Modify the callout leader: ■ ■ Select the callout boundary. and move it to the bottom right corner of the boundary. 5 On the Options Bar. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_04_i.rvt. for Scale. indicating that it’s the active view. and select Floor Plan from the Type Selector drop-down. select 1/4"=1'-0''. 6 Draw the callout around the ductwork as shown. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan is highlighted. 316 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . Select the Drag Head control (the control on the leader line that is closest to the callout head). 3 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Callout.

8 Create an angled leader line by dragging the Drag control located at the center of the leader as shown. Creating Callout Views | 317 . double-click M601 . Modify callout boundary line weight 9 Press Esc to clear the selection. and click in the empty space at the top center to place it. ■ Place the view on a sheet 12 In the Project Browser.HVAC Duct Plan & Sections. under Sheets (all). 11 On the Annotation Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog: ■ For the Callout Boundary category. change the line weight for the Callout Leader Line to 5. ■ Expand the Callout Boundary category and. select 5. 13 In the Project Browser. 10 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Object Styles. using the same method. drag it to the sheet. select Callout of Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. Click OK. for Line Weight.

The display of the ductwork changes from coarse detail to fine. enter Callout of Level 1 HVAC WSHP TYP. for View Name. and select the viewport. enter WSHP PART PLAN. right-click the callout view. 17 In the Project Browser. For Default View Template. 16 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. Ductwork in coarse detail 318 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . For Title on Sheet. and click Apply Default View Template. select HVAC Duct Detail-Documentation.Rename the detail view and modify view settings 14 Zoom to the callout view. Click OK. 15 Click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.

Ductwork in fine detail Create a detail callout 18 Open Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. 19 Zoom in to the area near the central stairs and section markers. The detail callout head has been updated with sheet information. 20 Double-click the section head at the left of the stairs to open Room 214 Section. Creating Callout Views | 319 .

enter Typical WSHP Detail. 27 Right-click Typical WSHP Detail. under Names. and select Detail from the Type Selector drop-down. 25 In the Project Browser. 24 Double-click the callout head to open the detail view. 29 Close the file with or without saving it. 28 In the Apply View Template dialog. select HVAC Duct Detail-Documentation. 320 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . and click OK. 22 Click Callout tab ➤ Element panel. 26 In the Rename View dialog. and click OK. The view is changed to a hidden line display and is moved to its new position in the Project Browser hierarchy. 23 Draw the callout boundary around the level 1 ductwork as shown.21 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Callout. and click Apply View Template. and click Rename.Design ➤ Detail Views (Detail). right-click the detail view. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .

■ create permanent dimensions in a lighting plan so that you can control the location of specific fixtures. symbols. 321 . duct tags. and annotation to create a legend. linetypes. and diffuser tags to an HVAC documentation plan. you learn how to: ■ add text notes. ■ work with model-based components.Working with Annotations and Dimensions 14 In this lesson.

rvt. 8 With the text still selected. 4 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. double-click Level 2 HVAC Duct Plan to make it the active view. 3 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. under Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ Floor Plans.Creating Annotations In this exercise. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Annotations_01_i. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you work with tag and leader types to create an annotated HVAC documentation plan. Add a text note to an HVAC documentation plan 1 In the Project Browser. use the drag grips to modify the text box width and position it so that it doesn’t cross the ductwork or wall. 5 Click Place Text tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ (Center). 6 Click to start the text note in between 2 of the branch ducts serving the perimeter supply air grilles. and select 3/32" Arial from the Type Selector drop-down. 7 Click anywhere in the view to finish editing. as shown. and enter RUN DUCT THROUGH OPEN WEB JOISTS. click Training Files. 322 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . 2 Zoom in to the offices in the lower right corner of the building in Area C.

Use the leader segment grips to create horizontal leader segments from the text box. and then click Right Straight. Creating Annotations | 323 . 11 Click Modify Text Notes tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ Add Leader: Left Straight. and a segment of rectangular duct.9 Press Esc twice. 16 In the drawing area. a segment of round duct. 12 Use the leader end grips to drag the arrows to point to the 2 branch ducts. verify that Leader is cleared. 13 Press Esc to clear the selection. 15 On the Options Bar. Add diffuser and duct tags by category 14 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. as shown. Add leaders 10 Select the text box. select a supply diffuser. a return diffuser.

and click Open. clear Leader. 20 In the Tags dialog. and click OK. 23 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. move diffuser tags off the ductwork. navigate to Annotations ➤ Duct. select Bottom Elevation Duct Tag. Place a loaded tag and modify its orientation In order to display additional information about an element. 22 In the Tags dialog. Load tags from library 19 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel drop-down ➤ Loaded Tags.rfa. 324 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . for Ducts. under Category. you can annotate the element with a second tag type. Tag remaining diffusers 18 Using the same method. 21 In the Load Family dialog. 24 On the Options Bar. If necessary.The information on each tag varies according to the category of element. tag the remaining diffusers in the area. verify that the Loaded Tag is Bottom Elevation Duct Tag.rfa and Flex Duct Tag Round. 17 Click Modify. click Load.

select the large horizontal segment of rectangular duct and the round duct. select Horizontal. Leader. 29 Zoom in to the piping near the stairs in the upper right corner of the building in Area A. open Documentation ➤ HVAC-Pipe ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 HVAC Pipe Plan ➤ Level 1 HVAC Pipe Plan_A. and then press Esc. 31 On the Options Bar. as shown. and Attached End. 26 On the Options Bar.25 In the drawing area. select the select the large pipe on the right as shown. specify Tag Orientation as Vertical. 32 In the drawing area. 27 Select the large segment of rectangular duct connected to the WSHP. Place tags with leaders 28 In the Project Browser. 30 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. Creating Annotations | 325 .

34 In the drawing area. 326 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . as shown.33 On the Options Bar. for Leader. select Free End. click the top horizontal pipe in the corridor. 35 Click above and to the right of the leader start point to place the leader as shown.

and the tags placed previously have changed to the new style as well. Edit a tag type You edit the type properties for the pipe size tag so that you can specify a different leader style. for Leader Arrowhead. 40 Using the method learned previously. select Dot Open 1/16". and click OK. 38 Click Modify Pipe Tags tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. select the last tag placed. and lock lighting fixtures. you use temporary dimensions to locate. and all elements of that type are affected. not simply an instance property. 39 In the Type Properties dialog. 37 In the drawing area. Notice that the new tags you place use the new style. 41 Close the file with or without saving it. Creating Dimensions | 327 . tag the bottom horizontal pipe as shown. Creating Dimensions In this exercise. lay out.36 Press Esc twice. That’s because you changed a type property.

4 Using the Move Witness Line control. click Training Files. 12 Press Esc. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 Lighting Plan ➤ Level 1 Lighting Plan_A is highlighted.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Lay out lighting fixtures using temporary and permanent dimensions 1 In the Project Browser. You can modify the preferred condition for dimension face selection. Continue the dimension string using the Edit Witness Lines feature 7 In the drawing area. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Annotations_02_i. 11 Click in any empty space in the drawing area to finish. and then select the interior face of the wall. 328 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . select the dimension line. drag the witness line on the right to the face of the wall on the left side of the selected lighting fixture. 5 Click to create a permanent dimension. 3 Select the upper left lighting fixture. 6 Press Esc to clear the selection. 10 Repeat for the remaining 2 top fixtures. 2 Zoom in to the left side of the plan.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 8 Click Modify Dimensions tab ➤ Witness Lines panel ➤ Edit Witness Lines. 9 Select the reference line at the center of the next fixture to the right. notice that Prefer : Wall faces is selected. On the Options Bar. indicating that it’s the active view.

3 1/2"). 16 Press Esc. add dimension strings for the remaining 2 rows of lighting fixtures in the room. 18 Select the dimension value (7' . Creating a Legend | 329 . 15 To lock the dimensions between the interior fixtures. click the 3 interior locks on the line. the fixtures shift to maintain constraints. 20 Close the file with or without saving it. Lock dimensions between fixtures 14 Select the center dimension line.13 Using the same method. and notes. and press Enter. linework. annotation symbols. and offset them 8' from the wall. 19 Using the same methods. enter 8'. you create an HVAC Sheet Metal legend using model-based legend components. Creating a Legend In this exercise. Training File ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Because the dimensions are locked. lock the dimensions of the interior fixtures for the remaining 2 rows. Modify dimensions to offset fixtures 17 Select the right lighting fixture in the center line.

place: ■ ■ ■ Air Terminals : Return Diffuser : 24 x 24 Face 12 x 12 Connection Air Terminals : Exhaust Grill : 24 x 24 Face 12 x 12 Connection Air Terminals : Supply Diffuser . select Floor Plan. 8 On the Options Bar: ■ For Family. 10 Using the same method. 6 Click Place Text tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify.Rectangular Face Round Neck : 24x24 . For Scale. Add model element detail components 7 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Legend Component. and select 1/4" Arial from the Type Selector drop-down. click below the title to place the diffuser. 4 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. Click OK. 5 Click in the drawing area. and enter DIFFUSER LEGEND.Sidewall : 18 x 8 330 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . select Air Terminals : Supply Diffuser . For View.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. ■ 9 In the drawing area. select 1/4" = 1' -0".8 Neck. Create a legend title 3 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. click Training Files. Create a legend view 1 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Legends drop-down ➤ Legend. 2 In the New Legend View dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Annotations_03_i. enter Diffuser Legend.

Add detail component text descriptions 12 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. and select 1/8" Arial from the Type Selector drop-down list. annotate the remaining components: ■ ■ ■ RETURN DIFFUSER EXHAUST GRILL SIDEWALL SUPPLY DIFFUSER 16 Click Modify. and enter SUPPLY DIFFUSER. 15 Using the same method and using the blue dashed reference lines for alignment. Creating a Legend | 331 . 13 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. 14 In the drawing area. click next to the top diffuser.11 Press Esc.

25 Select the center reference line as the mirror line. and click Modify Detail Items tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Mirror. 332 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions .DROP symbol to specify the copy end point. The selected detail lines are now thin. 28 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Element panel. and then press Esc. 20 Click the top left corner of the ELEVATION INCLINE . select Thin Lines from the Line Style drop-down. 19 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy.DROP and its text note. 29 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Symbol. 23 Delete the arrow and the left 3 lines at the center of the component. 24 Select the component’s break line.Create a legend symbol 17 In the Project Browser. 18 Select the ELEVATION INCLINE . 21 Press Esc. select the top and bottom detail lines on the left side of the component.RISE symbol for the copy start point. open HVAC_SM_DUCT_CONDITION legend view. 22 Zoom in to the copied component. 26 Press Esc. and then click the top left corner of the ELEVATION INCLINE . 27 While pressing Ctrl.

MECHANICAL LEGEND. 33 Click to the left of the left break line. and then click Modify.Target Filled from the Type Selector drop-down. 32 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. enter E. 31 Click below the center of the bottom component to place the symbol. mirror the text on the center reference line of the component. Creating a Legend | 333 . 34 Using the method learned previously. 36 Click anywhere in the view to finish editing. in the Ductwork-Sheet Metal column. and then click Modify. double-click Sheets (all) ➤ M100 .30 Select Spot Elevation . and then change the text note to CONNECT NEW DUCT TO EXISTING DUCT. Place legend views on a sheet 37 In the Project Browser. 35 Change the text on the right to N. 38 Drag Diffuser Legend from the Project Browser to the bottom of the sheet.

and select No Title from the Type Selector drop-down. click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel. 334 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . 40 Press Esc.39 With the viewport still selected. 41 Close the file with or without saving it.

Detailing 15 In this lesson. A drafting view using detail components. 335 . In the left pane of the Open dialog. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and text. click Training Files. 2 Double-click the right elevation head to open the Power Riser . A drafting detail by importing a CAD detail. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ Power ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 Power Plan ➤ Level 1 Power Plan_B is highlighted. A detail callout that references another view. detail groups. Tag electrical panels 1 In the Project Browser. Creating a Model-Based Electrical Riser Diagram Detail In this exercise. you will create: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ A model-based detail of an electrical power riser diagram. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_01_i. you place elevation views on a sheet and then arrange them as a single view in preparation of creating a one-line diagram. indicating that it’s the active view.113 East elevation view. A 3D isometric detail view of a typical WSHP Make Up detail.rvt.

7 Drag the Power Riser . Place views on a sheet 6 In the Project Browser. 8 Using the same method. Place the view close to the left edge of the sheet so that there is room in the same space for the east elevation view. Next. you place both the North and East elevation views on a sheet. and click to place it.113 East on the sheet. select each of the 2 panelboards. Notice that the software displays a dashed line so that you can align the views as you place them.3 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. and then modify and align the views. place Power Riser . 5 In the drawing area. clear Leader. 4 On the Options Bar. double-click Sheets (all) ➤ E101 .Electrical Power Riser Diagram to make it the active view.113 North elevation view from the Project Browser to the empty area at the upper left of sheet E101. 336 | Chapter 15 Detailing .

Modify level lines 11 In the drawing area. giving the appearance of a single view. select the 113 North view. for Title on Sheet. Doing this enables you to later drag the 113 East view to the left. under Identity Data. 15 In the Instance Properties dialog. 12 Select the Level 1 line. and click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. right-click.9 Press Esc. Creating a Model-Based Electrical Riser Diagram Detail | 337 . and click Deactivate View. enter Electrical Power Riser Diagram. and click Activate View. and click OK. Modify a viewport title 14 Select the title of the 113 North view. and use the filled circle drag control on the right to drag the end of the level line to the right. 10 Zoom to the power riser elevations on the sheet. 13 Right-click.

You also create a detail group and annotate the diagram. Align elevation views to resemble a single view 18 In the drawing area. 22 Press Esc. You combine views in order to create a one-line diagram. you use detail lines to create wiring for the one-line electrical riser diagram. and click Activate View. you add wiring to the diagram. right-click. 17 Click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel. 21 Using the drag control. 20 Select the 113 East elevation view again. 23 Close the file with or without saving it. select the 113 East elevation view. In the next exercise. and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. Creating Detail Wiring In this exercise. and select No Title from the Type Selector drop-down. 338 | Chapter 15 Detailing . right-click.Remove a viewport title display 16 Select the 113 East view. as shown. 19 Select the Level 1 line. move the view to the left so that it overlaps the 113 North view.

indicating that it’s the active view. 7 Click Place Detail Lines tab ➤ Element panel. This maximizes the drawing window so that you can more easily add wiring to the riser diagram. and then click OK. Draw linework to create a wiring diagram 5 In the drawing area.rvt. verify that Chain is selected. Under Modify Subcategories. 9 Beginning at the transformer. Zoom in as necessary and use the drag controls to make sure the lines clean up properly. click New.113 North view. 3 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Line Styles. Creating Detail Wiring | 339 . for Line Weight. expand Lines. notice that there are no snaps active. As you draw. 8 On the Options Bar. as shown. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_02_i. 6 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. and select Electrical Power from the Type Selector drop-down. 4 In the Line Styles dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Category. and click OK. select 6.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. In the Line Styles dialog. for Name.Electrical Power Riser Diagram is highlighted. verify that Sheets (all) ➤ E101 . In the left pane of the Open dialog. Create a linetype 1 In the Project Browser. enter Electrical Power. zoom in to the service transformer (T-SVC) located at the bottom left of the Power Riser . In the New Subcategory dialog. click Training Files. 2 Close the Project Browser. draw lines to represent the wiring to the switchboard (SWB).

enter 1/8". add lines to represent wiring between the switchboard and a panel on level 3 (MDP_3).10 Press Esc. 12 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Offset. for Offset. 13 On the Options Bar. 14 Click to place lines offset to the right and above the first 2 lines from the switchboard. as shown. 340 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 11 Using the same method.

19 Select the horizontal line to the right of the first line. Creating Detail Wiring | 341 .15 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. 16 Draw a line to connect the offset line to MDP_2. so that the result is as shown. 17 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Trim. 18 Select the vertical detail line that connects into MDP_2 as the first line to trim. you select the portion of the line that you want to keep. TIP When you use the Trim tool.

and then copy them to multiple locations in the diagram. 21 Zoom in to panel MP-1B.20 Continue adding detail lines until the diagram is wired as shown. Add a break symbol and note You create the break symbol and text note once. 342 | Chapter 15 Detailing .

22 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. Copy the symbol and text 30 Select the text. 27 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. and select 3/32" Arial Transparent from the Type Selector drop-down. The name of the detail arc (Start-End-Radius) indicates the order in which you select the defining points of the arc. 23 Click Place Detail Lines tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ (Start-End-Radius Arc). 24 Draw a “cap” (the break symbol) over the 3 vertical lines at the top of the panel. as shown. and type SEE MECHANICAL CONNECTION SCHEDULE. Creating Detail Wiring | 343 . and use the drag controls to resize the text box and position it as shown. 26 Click Place Text tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ No Leader. and then click Alignment panel ➤ Horizontal: (Center). 29 Click Modify. 25 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. 28 Click above the cap.

35 Click the endpoint of each of the corresponding lines for the other 2 mechanical panels (MP-2B and MP-3B) as the copy endpoints. 33 On the Options Bar. 344 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 32 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. select the text and the detail arc of the break symbol. select Multiple. 34 Click the endpoint of the left vertical line under the break symbol as the copy start point.31 While pressing Ctrl.

42 On the Options Bar. 40 Press Esc. enter 3/32". Creating Detail Wiring | 345 .36 Press Esc. 41 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Offset. enter 0 0. 43 Click twice to place 2 more lines below the first line. You enter exact values for each line length. 38 Beginning below the level 1 switchboard. Create a ground wire You use 3 detail lines to create a ground wire symbol. click to specify the start point of the first horizontal line.5. 37 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. and press Enter. for Offset. 39 Move the cursor to the right. and then press Esc.

and press Enter. Create a detail group By grouping the lines that represent the ground wire. change the length of the bottom line to 0 0. enter Ground. 50 With the group selected.125.25. while pressing Ctrl. select all 3 lines. 346 | Chapter 15 Detailing . for Name. expand Groups ➤ Detail. and then press Esc.44 Edit the offset lines: ■ ■ ■ Select the middle line. drag the Modify Group Origin control to the midpoint of the top detail line. You can also specify the origin point of the group so that it is placed accurately. you can ensure that they stay together. Using the same method. Press Esc. 47 In the drawing area. enter 0 0. click on the length dimension value. and click OK. 48 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Group. 49 In the Create Detail Group dialog. 45 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down ➤ Project Browser to open the browser view. 46 In the Project Browser. Notice that the new Ground group displays in the Project Browser.

56 Draw a detail line to connect each ground wire group to its transformer. and click Modify Detail Groups tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move. TP-2B. and TP-3B) to place the ground wire group in those locations. Creating Detail Wiring | 347 . 53 Click the origin of the detail group as the move start point. 52 Select the detail group. draw a detail line that extends from the bottom right of the switchboard. and click Modify Detail Groups tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Similar. and then click the endpoint of the detail line as the move end point.51 Using the method learned previously. 55 Click below each of the transformers (TP-1B. 54 Select the group.

click Training Files. 4 Right-click the ViewCube. Prepare the view 1 In the Project Browser. 5 Zoom in to view the section. and click OK. and will place it on sheet E01.Pin wires and view You pin the view and all detail lines so that they don’t get moved accidentally. for Name. 59 Close the file with or without saving it. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. You use a view template to isolate the mechanical components so that you can annotate the detail components. 57 Using a crossing window (beginning at lower left and extending to upper right).rvt. right-click Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Duct & Equipment. enter Typical Make Up Air Isometric Detail. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 2 Right-click the copy. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_03_i. you duplicate an existing view and orient it to a section view in order to create an isometric detail view. select the entire Electrical Riser Power Diagram viewport. and click Rename. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you will create the Mechanical Connection Schedule referenced here. In later exercises. 348 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 3 In the Rename View dialog. Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail In this exercise. and click Orient to View ➤ Sections ➤ Typical Make Up Air. 58 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Pin.

and then press Esc.6 Select the section box. and drag the top grip down so that the section includes only the first floor. 7 On the ViewCube. click Home. Back. and Left sides converge. Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail | 349 . and then click the corner where the Top.

select 3D HVAC Iso. This isolates the mechanical components by turning off the architectural components.Apply a view template 8 In the Project Browser. and select 3/32" Arial from the Type Selector drop-down. Under Names. 350 | Chapter 15 Detailing . Hide elements in a view 10 Select the long rectangular duct at the rear. Annotate the view 11 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. and click Apply View Template. Click OK. right-click. select 3D Views. 13 Click Place Text tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ Two Segments. right-click Typical Make Up Air Isometric Detail. 12 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. Walkthroughs. You hide this duct because it’s not part of the detail being created. 9 In the View Templates dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Show Type.

click Place Text tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ Horizontal: 18 Press Esc. Enter Makeup Air Duct from AHU-1. and drag the controls to resize the text box as shown. Change text alignment 17 With the text still selected. and click to specify the second leader point. Typical. 16 Select the text for the 8x8 duct. label the connecting duct 8x8 Makeup Air to Return Plenum (Provide Motorized Damper). 15 Using the same method. Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail | 351 . (Right). 19 Complete the text labels. as shown.14 Place the label: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click on the long rectangular duct to start the leader. Move the cursor to the left and click to specify the text insertion point. Click Place Text tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. Move the cursor down and to the left.

Place the view on a sheet 27 In the Project Browser. and then click OK. 23 Click on the crop region. type VP to open the instance properties for the view.To rotate and reposition a text label. 28 Drag the new isometric view from the Project Browser onto the sheet. 24 Access the instance properties for the view. as shown. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. open Sheets (all) ➤ M601-HVAC DUCT PLAN & SECTIONS. select Crop Region Visible. under Extents. 25 Click OK. and under Extents. select Crop View and clear Crop Region Visible. and use the drag controls to position the boundaries around the detail. select the label and use the Drag and Rotate controls that display. Modify the view 20 In the drawing area. 22 Zoom out so that the isometric detail and the crop region are both visible. 352 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 26 Zoom to the drawing extents.

Use detail lines to create a detail group. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_04_i. enter Typical Floor Drain Detail. 2 In the New Drafting View dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name. and then select Viewport Square from the Type Selector drop-down. Drafting Detail Components In this exercise.29 In the drawing area. Place a detail component. 30 Close the file with or without saving it. select 3" = 1'-0". By defining a Sub-Discipline and a View Classification. right-click the view name. 3 In the Project Browser. click Training Files. and click Properties. you: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Create a drafting view. The new view is listed in the Project Browser under Views (Discipline) ➤ ??? ➤ ??? ➤ Drafting Views (Detail). select the isometric view. Click OK. you can more accurately locate the view in the Project Browser hierarchy. Drafting Detail Components | 353 . Annotate the drafting view using keynotes and text notes.rvt. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. For Scale. Create a drafting view 1 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Drafting View. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Work with a filled region that represents a detail component.

Click OK. select Medium Lines from the Line Style drop-down. Use a filled region to create a concrete slab 10 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Region drop-down ➤ Region. 11 Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ (Rectangle). click the point at the top of the drain. Place a floor drain detail component 5 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Detail Component. Notice the new location of the view in the Project Browser. and select Floor Drain with Waterproofing-Section from the Type Selector drop-down. as shown. 7 Click in the middle of the drawing area to place the component. for Sub-Discipline. For View Classification. 12 On the Element panel. as the rectangle start point. select Documentation. 6 Click Place Detail Component tab ➤ Element panel. 354 | Chapter 15 Detailing .4 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Graphics. 9 Zoom in to the component. 8 Click Place Detail Component tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. select Plumbing. 14 Drag the cursor down and to the left so that the rectangle is 1' 8" x 5 1/2". 13 In the drawing area.

25 Click Modify Detail Items > Edit Boundary tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ 26 Zoom to the lower left corner of the filled region.P.I. 17 Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab ➤ Region panel ➤ Finish Region. 27 Using the following illustration as a guide. 24 Click Modify Detail Items tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Edit Boundary. Add a structural metal deck detail group 19 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Group drop-down ➤ Place Detail Group. select the filled region. 23 In the drawing area. Drafting Detail Components | 355 .15 Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Region Properties. click to select the indicated points in succession from left to right to define the new boundary. and click OK. and then press Esc. Concrete. 21 In the drawing area. click the bottom left corner of the filled region to specify the group insertion point. 20 Select 1. 16 In the Instance Properties dialog. Modify the boundary of the filled region You edit the boundary of the concrete slab so that it matches the contour of the metal deck. select C. (Line). 22 Click Modify. click Modify Detail Items tab ➤ Arrange ➤ Send to Back drop-down ➤ Send to Back.5 NR 18 from the Type Selector drop-down. for Type. 18 With the filled region still selected.

33 Click the endpoint of the copied chain as the start point for the next chain. and then select the base of the slab to the right of the line. 31 On the Options Bar. 35 Draw a line from the end of the last copied boundary line down to the base of the slab. 37 Select the small vertical line you just drew. select Multiple. 36 Click Modify Detail Items > Edit Boundary tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Trim. 34 Press Esc. and then click point 6 as the endpoint. 29 Highlight one of the lines you just drew. press Tab to highlight the chain of lines. 30 Click Modify Detail Items > Edit Boundary tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy.28 Click Modify. 356 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 32 Click point 1 to specify it as the start point. and then click to select them.

and then select the side of the slab above the line. draw a rectangle on top of the filled region. 41 Type ZF to zoom out. 45 Using the method learned previously.38 Pan to the other end of the slab. Drafting Detail Components | 357 . (Rectangle). and then press Esc. 39 Select the line between points 1 and 2. 40 Click Finish Region. 43 Select Medium Lines from the Line Style drop-down. The boundary of the slab now matches the contour of the metal deck. Create a floor component 42 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. as shown. 44 Click Place Detail Lines tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ This represents the vinyl composition flooring.

draw wide detail lines as shown. press Tab to highlight the chain. and then click to select them. select the Flashing Membrane group. and click OK. 52 In the Create Group dialog.Create a detail group 46 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. for Name.D. 50 Highlight one of the wide lines. 48 Using the existing thin line as a guide. Notice that the origin point of the group is at the center. 51 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Group. 54 Drag the origin point so that it snaps to the right endpoint of the detail lines. 358 | Chapter 15 Detailing . Modify the group origin point 53 In the drawing area. 49 Click Modify. enter Flashing Membrane_F.. 47 Select Wide Lines from the Line Style drop-down. as shown.

as shown. add a breakline at the midpoint of the slab’s left edge.55 Press Esc. 60 Click the midpoint of the drain to specify the breakline location. Add breaklines 56 Type ZO to zoom out. 58 Select Break Line from the Type Selector drop-down. 59 Press Spacebar 3 times to orient the component correctly. 61 Using the same method. Drafting Detail Components | 359 . 57 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Detail Component.

Modify breakline boundaries 63 Select the left breakline. 70 In the Keynotes dialog. 360 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 67 On the Options Bar. 68 Select the top of the drain as the object to tag. 66 Select Keynote Text from the Type Selector drop-down. and then click OK. 71 Click Modify. 72 If necessary. select Division 22 ➤ 22 13 00 ➤ 22 13 16 ➤ 22 13 16. select Leader and Free End.62 Press Esc twice. as shown.A1 Floor Drain W/O Waterproofing. 69 Click twice to place the leader as shown. 64 Press Esc twice. 65 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Keynote drop-down ➤ User. and use the grips to resize the masking region. select the keynote and drag the text to the right. Add a keynote You begin annotating the detail components by adding a keynote for the floor drain object.

73 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. and then click anywhere in the view to finish editing. and click to specify the text insertion point. 76 To select the leader start point. 77 Move the cursor up and to the left.Add text notes You add text notes to continue annotating the view. and use the drag controls to resize and move the text box as shown. click in the area indicated by the left arrow in the following image. 78 Move the cursor to the left. 80 Press Esc twice. and click to specify the second leader point. 79 Enter Adjustable Nickel Bronze Strainer with 4” Flange. 74 Click Place Text tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ Two Segments. 81 Select the text note. Drafting Detail Components | 361 . 75 Click Place Text tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ (Right).

362 | Chapter 15 Detailing . as shown. 84 Using the following image as a guide. 83 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimension panel ➤ Aligned. click to select the slab lines in the order indicated.82 Continue annotating the detail. Add dimensions You add a dimension with multiple references.

Place the detail on a sheet 86 In the Project Browser.Plumbing Part Plans & Details. and then press Esc twice. 90 Press Esc. and click to place it. 88 In the drawing area. 87 Drag Typical Floor Drain Detail from the Project Browser to the top center of the sheet. 89 Select Viewport Square from the Type Selector drop-down.85 Click to the left of the slab to place the dimension line. 91 Close the file with or without saving it. Drafting Detail Components | 363 . open P103 . select the view title.

Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. select Visible. expand Roof Drains Overflow Imperial. 2 Click Insert tab ➤ Import panel ➤ Import CAD. 7 On the Imported Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Category.dwg. select 3. select Black and White. double-click Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ Plumbing ➤ Drafting Views (Detail) ➤ Roof Drain Overflow Detail to make it the active view. for Line Weight.rvt. 364 | Chapter 15 Detailing . ■ ■ ■ ■ 4 Type ZF to zoom the view. For Colors. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. Modify the CAD drawing line weight 5 Zoom to the left side of the detail. 3 In the Import CAD Formats dialog: ■ Navigate to Training\Imperial\06_Construction Documentation. you import a CAD detail drawing. Click Open. Import a CAD detail drawing 1 In the Project Browser. 6 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Object Styles. and select Roof Drain Overflow Imperial. and modify line weight properties in the imported drawing. For Import units.Importing a CAD Drawing In this exercise. Click OK. For A-----NPP. For Layers. select Auto-Detect. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_05_i.

12 In the drawing area. Place the detail on a sheet 9 In the Project Browser. Importing a CAD Drawing | 365 . open P103 . 13 Click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel. select the viewport title. and then press Esc.Plumbing Part Plans & Details. 14 Drag the title to the small space below the viewport. 15 Close the file with or without saving it. and select Viewport Square from the Type Selector drop-down. 11 Press Esc.8 Type ZF. 10 Drag Roof Drain Overflow Detail from the Project Browser to the upper right of the sheet.

366 .

Sign up to vote on this title
UsefulNot useful